JP6246766B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  There is a gaming machine that executes an initial operation process after executing an origin detection operation process (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-076173 A

  However, since the initial operation process is performed regardless of the mode of the origin detection operation process, a suitable initial operation may not be performed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can execute a suitable initial operation.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1), and a plurality of movable accessories (for example, FIG. 36, etc.) that perform the operation. And the movement control mechanism 173A of the movable accessory 173, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C, and the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175, etc. Return operation control means capable of executing a return operation to return to a position (for example, an operation to return to the origin position whose operation is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 (origin return operation) indicated by a dotted line in FIGS. 43 to 46). If, when at least the power supply is turned on, the initial operation of the response Ji and variable dynamic role object in the presence or absence of execution of the return operation (e.g., a short initial operation shown in FIGS. 43 46) executable to An initial operation control means, executable demonstration execution means directing a (e.g., portions for performing the steps S8006, S172 using the process table selected in step S8004 in effect control CPU 120), the initial operation control means Does not perform the initial operation for the movable accessory for which the return operation has been performed, performs the initial operation for the movable accessory for which the return operation has not been performed, and the effect execution means operates the movable accessory alone. A single operation effect (for example, a first single character effect to a fourth single character effect) and a linked operation effect (for example, a linked character effect. For example, “linked”) Is that a plurality of movable actors appear to have some relationship with each other, that is, “interlocking operation effect” means that a plurality of movable actors are It is an effect that is operated so as to be related. “Interlocked operation effect” is recognized by the player that a plurality of movable actors have some relationship by operating a plurality of movable actors integrally. Effect (for example, an effect of combining a plurality of movable accessories), or each movable accessory is operated independently, and is controlled by the timing of operation or control of other effect members. Effect that causes the player to recognize that the movable combination of the item has some relationship (for example, an effect of displaying an image indicating that the plurality of movable combinations are operating integrally on the image display device 5). It is also possible to execute the above. According to such a configuration, a suitable initial operation can be executed.
Further, the initial operation control means does not move the movable accessory after returning the movable accessory to the origin position by the return operation when the movable accessory is not at the origin position when the power is turned on. When the movable accessory is at the origin position, an initial operation for moving the movable accessory from the origin position may be performed.

  (Means 2) In the means 1, the initial operation control means is in a state where the movable accessory is at the origin position before the return operation (for example, the origin sensor 171A shown in FIG. 36 or the origin sensor 171B shown in FIG. (For example, in the operation of (3) and (6) shown in FIG. 43 and the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in (4) and (5)). The initial operation may be performed in the operation of). According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation in the initial operation even if the movable accessory is at the origin position from the beginning.

  (Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the initial operation control means does not perform the initial operation on the movable accessory that has performed the return operation (for example, the rotation mechanism that performs the operation (2) shown in FIG. 46). 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B that has performed the operation of (1) may not be performed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable initial operation by suppressing the time required for the operation check.

  (Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the initial motion control means performs the return operation (for example, in FIG. 45, the rotating mechanism 173A that performed the return operation (1) in FIG. 45). The initial operation (for example, the operations (4) and (7) of the rotation mechanism 173A in FIG. 45) is the initial operation (for example, (5) of the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 45). And (6) or the like). According to such a configuration, a suitable initial operation according to the situation can be executed.

  (Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the confirmation operation of the movable accessory corresponding to the effect operation after the initial operation is performed (for example, the rotating mechanism of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIGS. 39 to 42) 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B or a slide mechanism 173C, and a long initial operation of the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175, etc.) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably confirm the production operation by performing the confirmation operation of the movable accessory.

  (Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the return operation control means executes the movable accessory initial action process of step S151 executed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. The return operation may be performed at a timing other than the timing (for example, the timing of execution of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of step S1014 executed by the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 29). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the rendering operation by performing the return operation other than when the power is turned on.

  (Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the initial motion control means is an initial motion in which a plurality of motions are mixed (for example, the slide mechanism 173C controlled by the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 47) and (3) leftward sliding operation and rightward sliding operation shown in FIG. 47 are mixed, and (4) to (6) horizontal sliding operation shown in FIG. 47) may be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable initial operation by suppressing the time required for confirming the plurality of operations of the movable accessory.

  (Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, a confirmation operation control means for performing a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable accessory when the gaming machine is activated (for example, in the first modification, The control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes the operation of the movable member initialization process in step S51B), and the initial operation control means performs an initial operation (for example, a movable member break-in process in the first modification) when the gaming machine is activated. (For example, in the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 executes the running-in operation in step S51A in FIG. 52 and the movable member running-in process in FIG. 53). Good. According to such a configuration, since the movement of the movable accessory is not familiar, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable accessory. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable accessory from operating well.

  (Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the effect execution means includes a first effect (for example, a non-movable body notice effect (cut-in notice, group notice)) and a second effect that operates a movable accessory. (For example, the movable body advance notice A (movable body advance notice A, movable body advance notice B, movable body advance notice C)) can be executed (for example, the production control CPU 120 uses the lottery result in step S3906 to determine in step S8004). Steps S8006 and S172 are executed based on the selected process table). When the execution ratio of the second effect in the predetermined period is high, the execution of the second effect is restricted and the ratio is higher than when the execution ratio is low. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body notice effect five times or more in the last ten fluctuations (step by step). (S3902 Y), the limited time notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 56B (the movable object notice effect execution rate is lower than the normal notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 56A), and the non-movable object notice Step S3906 may be executed using a notice effect execution lottery table with a high effect execution ratio). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the operation of the movable accessory while preventing an increase in cost.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable accessory initial action process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial stage operation execution process during a demonstration. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an accessory effect execution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5th production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator A and actuator C which operate a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator B which operates a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator D which operates a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A and the actuator B. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A and the actuator C. FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A and the actuator C. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement A of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement B of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement D of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the coupling | bonding of the initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the actuator D. FIG. In Modification 1, (A) is a front view showing the effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed from diagonally forward in Modification 1. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the effect unit is viewed obliquely from behind in Modification Example 1; In the modification 1, (A) is a front view which shows the state which has a movable part in a tilting position, (B) is the state which has a movable part in a standing position. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process in Modification 1; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable member break-in process in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process in the modification 2. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of an operation count storage area in Modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice effect execution lottery table in the modification 2.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the “winnings”, winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as “starting winning”, and in particular, winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as “first starting prize”. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in the image display device 5 A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing the variable display game (described later) is satisfied.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a second special symbol game (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B or a decorative symbol executed in the image display device 5 is displayed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (described later) is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. , When simply referred to as “special figure hold memory number” or “pending memory number”, any one or two of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number It may be pointed to. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also called a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time) As long as the fluctuation time is within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed.

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA displaying a special image representing information including active display (also called digestion display, current display) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special map hold information (Digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame that surrounds the active display, an active display or an active display, or an active display such as a character or an image displayed around the active display frame Information corresponding to the display is displayed by a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice for requesting an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A movable accessory 173 and a movable accessory 175 are provided inside the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 perform predetermined operations in the area of the gaming machine frame 3 as production operations. FIG. 1 shows a case where the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are at the origin position. As an effect operation, the movable accessory 173 ascends to the right diagonally upward from the origin position, stops at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as an operation end, and hides a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, the operation of returning to the origin position is performed again. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32 and the like, the movable accessory 173 performs an effect operation that splits into a plurality of parts after moving to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, the movable accessory 175 descends from the origin position as an effect operation, stops at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as an operation end, hides a part of the display screen of the image display device 5, and again returns to the origin. Move back to the position. In addition, the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 may perform an operation of stopping and returning to the origin position again without moving from the origin position to the center of the display screen, which is the operation end, as an effect operation. . The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 may be selectively executed as a staging operation, that is, a strong operation that repeats a violent movement operation and a weak operation that is gentler than the strong operation. Further, when the movable accessory 173 operates, an effect operation of lighting a light emitting member 9CC described later may be performed.

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 175, a light emitting member 9CL and a light emitting member 9CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member 9U is placed on the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the gaming machine 1 includes other rendering devices such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower unit. May be.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous for the player a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special game becomes “big hit”, and wins a big prize. The mouth state (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round and keeps the grand prize opening open, and then closes the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening closed. End the round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  In addition, the grand prize opening is maintained in the closed state instead of the aspect in which the round is started by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state as described above (the aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts (a mode in which the grand prize opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the pachinko machine 1 keeps the grand prize opening closed without opening the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening open. Alternatively, the grand prize opening door may be closed to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, 16) It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is the upper limit number (if the predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening) even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit. May be.

  In the round, the big prize opening is either a predetermined time (opening period) after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the big prize opening occurs. It is maintained in an open state until the period until. The predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the open state in the round is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is maintained closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). There may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round having a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) in which the big prize opening is in an open state (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as a normal open round. A round in which the predetermined time (opening period) for which the big prize opening is in an open state is relatively short (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In addition, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not passed since the opening of the grand prize opening door, if the predetermined number of winnings to the big prize opening occurs, the grand prize opening changes from the open state to the closed state. However, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, , Normal state, time-short state, probability change state) and the period (eg, time-short state, probability change state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit game state (for example, the number of time reductions, ST The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times).

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of one of the special game games, the decorative display variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of variable display by the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative design that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9, or the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory It may be included that the operation (stationary, fine movement, movement, etc.) of the object 175 or the like is different from the operation mode before the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol resulting in variable display is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. In addition, the number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. Further, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example in which the revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5) is shown, but the revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display or a message window display There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol start changing at the same time, start timing at the same time, or when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol do not start changing at the same time. For the first time the symbol that starts to change is the timing at which the change starts, etc.) and the effect that makes the change start order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol different from the normal time May be executed as In addition, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as a notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be due to an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be based on sound output from the speaker 8, light emission from the lamp 9, operation of the movable accessory 173, and the like.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning of a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR is prepared. It may be. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , And the like), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect that is acted on or indirectly (holding action effect), or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another This includes an effect to change to the notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) (active display change effect) and an effect to be executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, and activates a character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect), or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and displays characters and the like in the display area of the image display device 5 as active display Includes direct or indirect effects (active display effects) Good. The active display change effect is an effect that changes the special image to the notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is a production that changes. Note that there may be a case where an active display change gaze effect that is an effect mode that is at least partially in common with the active display change effect is executed. Note that an active display change effect or an active display change effect may be executed as a main notice effect such as a step-up notice effect. When the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the target of action changes, but when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the hold effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as a hold effect.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round that is controlled when the 8R probability variable big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is a normal open round jackpot symbol. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normal open round jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it is 8R probability variation big hit, but when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise accuracy ”)” in which a short-term opening round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern having an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After reaching the reach state and executing a predetermined reach effect, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is achieved, the decorative symbol variable display is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, or without being in a reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variable big hit. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to a 2R probability variable jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) ”) Or a combination of decorative symbols including a chance symbol or the like (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”,“ 2 ”, where“ accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state that is executed 16 times (rounds). ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds).

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. Probability change control is a condition in which a special game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probability change number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit has been reached, and the probability variation control for a predetermined number of STs (for example, 70 times) is completed after the end. Is performed, and time reduction control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (the number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability variation) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation). Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different. In the following description, a big hit gaming state, a state where probability variation control is performed, a state where time reduction control is performed, and the like may be referred to as advantageous states.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variable big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variable big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is performed. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time-shortening control as in the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when probability variation control is being performed, when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). In such a mode, as a mode of “big hit”, it is good to provide a normal big hit that is not subjected to probability variation control after the end. For example, when an 8R normal big hit is provided, based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is achieved, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which eight rounds are executed. (Time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, the variation is changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit may be finally stopped and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols.

  In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round-number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big win is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the period until the final round ends ( Or, after the end of the final round, during the period until the next variable display game is started), a probability variation promotion effect that informs that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The effect control board 12 has a function of determining the control content of the movable accessory control device 17. The movable accessory control device 17 performs drive control of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 in accordance with the control content determined by the effect control board 12. The movable accessory control device 17 receives origin detection signals from origin sensors 171A to 171D that detect the origin positions of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175. The movable accessory control device 17 outputs a drive signal for driving the actuators 172A to 172D that drive the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175.

  As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, the movable accessory 173 has three movable mechanisms: a rotation mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B, and a slide mechanism 173C. The actuator 172A rotates the rotation mechanism 173A to move the movable accessory 173 from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. The origin sensor 171A detects the rotation mechanism 173A and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the rotation direction. The actuator 172B opens and closes the opening / closing mechanism 173B to move the split pieces 173B1 to 173B3 of the movable accessory 173 from the closed state to the open state. The origin sensor 171B detects the opening / closing mechanism 173B, and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the opening / closing direction. Further, the actuator 172C moves the slide mechanism 173C laterally to move the movable accessory 173 from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the left and right. The origin sensor 171C detects the slide mechanism 173C, and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the lateral movement direction. That is, the movable accessory 173 performs a plurality of operations by the plurality of actuators 172A to 172C.

  By the way, the movable accessory 173 has three movable mechanisms, that is, a rotation mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B, and a slide mechanism 173C, and the CPU 120 for effect control is independent of each movable mechanism as an individual movable accessory. Can be controlled. In the present embodiment, the “movable combination” refers to a combination of a plurality of movable mechanisms such as the movable combination 173 and also refers to each movable mechanism. For example, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B will be described as separate movable accessories.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, the movable accessory 175 is moved in the vertical direction from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the actuator 172D. The origin sensor 171D detects that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a confirmed ornament symbol (final stop symbol) in each ornament symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates execution of a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery designation command is a command for causing the gaming machine 1 to execute a power failure recovery process after power supply is resumed from the power failure state. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes power failure recovery processing. The effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, an initial operation of the effect device as the power failure recovery process. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, a power failure recovery screen may be displayed on the image display device 5 for notifying the player that the power has recovered from the power failure. In addition, as an initial operation of the rendering device, an origin return operation for returning the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 to the origin position and an initial operation for confirming the operation of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 may be performed. . Moreover, you may make it perform the test lighting of the lamp | ramp 9, the output of the monitor sound from the speaker 8, etc. as an initial operation of a production | presentation apparatus.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying that specifies whether a start winning is made at the first starting winning opening or a starting winning is made at the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  The command E0XXH is an initialization designation command that designates initialization. Receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process according to the EXT data XX (hexadecimal number) of the initialization designation command. For example, in the EXT data, the initial operation of the image display device 5, the movable accessory 173, or the rendering device of the movable accessory 175 can be designated. In the present embodiment, the initialization designation command is transmitted to the sub-board in the initialization process of step S71 executed once when the power is turned on in the main process of the CPU 103 described later with reference to FIG. However, the initialization designation command may be transmitted at another timing.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 16A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. If it is determined as “big hit”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category (based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category) is determined. Fluctuation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command and the big hit type, The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  Note that the effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are displayed by the effect control CPU 120 on one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, and the movable accessory). Used to control the object 175). Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the processing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, the variation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “PC3” for the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) are provided. May be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (accuracy) fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the definite special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display result is referred to as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) ”And“ Lose ”special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state is set. Value) is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. Specifically, in the low-accuracy state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (a value in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of decision values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes high.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50) determined values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determined values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than the first special figure, so that the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is not provided. However, in the case of providing the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), in the case of the second special figure game, compared to the case of the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (probable variation count) and the short time count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  A movable accessory control device 17 is connected to the effect control board 12. The movable accessory control device 17 controls the operations of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 in accordance with instructions from the effect control CPU 120. As described above, the movable agent control device 17 is connected to the origin sensors 171A to 171D that detect the origin positions of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175. In addition, the movable combination control device 17 is connected to the movable combination 173 and actuators 172A to 172D that drive the movable combination 175. As the origin sensor, a contact type sensor such as a micro switch, or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor can be used.

  The origin sensors 171A to 171D are sensors that detect that the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position and output a detection signal. The origin sensors 171A to 171D change the detection signal from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state when the movable combination is detected. In the present embodiment, the case where the origin sensors 171A to 171D detect digital (ON / OFF) signals will be described. However, the origin sensors 171A to 171D may output analog values, for example. For example, a resolver or a rotary encoder attached to a laser sensor or a motor may be used to output an analog value.

  The movable accessory control device 17 can control the outputs to the actuators 172A to 172D based on the detection signals input from the origin sensors 171A to 171D. The movable accessory control device 17 performs control so that the origin sensor 171A to 171D moves the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 from the position where the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is detected to the operation end of each actuator. can do. For example, the movable accessory controller 17 operates the actuator 172A when the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in an ON state, and moves the movable accessory 173 to an operation end that is locked by a mechanical stopper (not shown). be able to. Further, when the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in the off state, the movable accessory control apparatus 17 can move the actuator 172A to the origin position where the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in the on state.

  The actuators 172A to 172D are, for example, a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid, or the like. When the actuators 172A to 172D are motors, the movable accessory control device 17 may have a function of a motor driver. When the actuators 172A to 172D are electromagnetic solenoids, the movable accessory control device 17 may have a function of supplying a voltage for operating the electromagnetic solenoids.

  In this embodiment, the case where the origin sensors 171A to 171D are arranged in order to detect the position of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is illustrated. However, for example, the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 You may make it arrange | position the sensor which detects that it exists in an operation | movement end. Moreover, although the case where there are four actuators 172A to 172D is illustrated, the number of actuators is not limited to this. Details of the operation of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, the ROM 121 has any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the first hold display displayed in the first start-winning storage display area 5HL as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. The 1st hold | maintenance display mode determination table referred in order to determine may be memorize | stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first hold display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. . Each first hold display mode determination table includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the second hold display displayed in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display is displayed. A second hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not may be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, as a table relating to execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display, whether the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is changed to another display mode. In order to determine which display mode to change to the first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode. A first hold change mode determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination ratios that change to another display mode and no change to another display mode, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. Each first pending change presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether there is a change or not. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display after the change is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables, one large first hold change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first hold change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change mode determination tables, one large first hold change mode determination table including information of all the first hold change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the ROM 121 changes the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR as another table as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display. To determine whether to change to a second pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode, or to change to another display mode The 2nd pending | holding change aspect determination table referred to may be memorize | stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing such as the number of changes to be executed later). May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good. Similarly, the ROM 121 has a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). It may be stored.

  Note that a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table is a ROM 121. May be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table related to the holding action effect to be applied indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding action effect, when it is determined that the holding action effect is to be executed, the holding action effect effect that is referred to in order to determine which effect mode is selected from among the plurality of effect modes. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of hold action effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold effect effect effect mode determination table and the respective determination ratios may be stored. . In each hold action effect effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold effect effect may be assigned to each effect mode.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or second hold display). Alternatively, a table for determining whether or not to execute the holding action gaze effect may be stored as a table relating to the holding action gaze effect that is applied indirectly or indirectly. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action / gase effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the holding action gaze effect, the holding action that is referred to in order to determine which of the plurality of presentation modes is determined when it is determined to execute the holding action gasse effect. A gasse effect effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of hold action gaze effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of effect mode of the hold action gaze effect that can be determined in the hold action gaze effect effect mode determination table. May be. Even if each holding mode has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the holding mode effect production mode, each of the production modes is assigned to the respective holding mode gaze production production mode determination table. Good.

  When executing an active display change effect that changes a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 is referred to as a table related to the active display change effect to determine whether to execute the active display change effect. The active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to determine which of the plurality of effects is selected. You may memorize | store the change production production | presentation aspect determination table in ROM121. Specifically, a plurality of active display change effect effect mode determination tables are stored in which the types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect effect mode determination table are different from each other. May be. Each active display change effect presentation mode determination table has a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display change effect assigned to each of the effect modes. Good.

  In addition, in the ROM 121, the CPU 120 for effect control is used for controlling effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, and the movable accessory 175). Data constituting a plurality of effect control patterns is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and an end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 120. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit.

  The movable accessory control data is data for designating the rendering operation of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175. The production control CPU 120 controls the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 so as to perform a production operation with a predetermined operation pattern via the movable combination control device 17 based on the movable combination control data. The movable combination control data includes at least one operation pattern of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175. However, the movable combination control data may include a plurality of operation patterns of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175. For example, the movable combination control data may include an operation pattern in which the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 operates strongly and an operation pattern in which the movable combination 175 operates weakly. The strong motion is, for example, an operation pattern in which the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 operates large or for a long time in the movable range. On the other hand, the weak operation is an operation pattern in which the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 operates in a movable range smaller or in a shorter time than the strong operation. In the case where a plurality of movement patterns of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are included in the movable combination control data, the effect control CPU 120 may select and execute the operation pattern according to the production conditions. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may select a strong motion pattern during a super reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a big hit effect, and the like, and may select a weak motion pattern during a normal reach. The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 operate in a plurality of operation patterns, so that the interest can be improved.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  The effect control pattern may include control data for controlling the initial operation of the effect device. As described above, the initial operation of the effect device is, for example, an operation executed to confirm the operation of the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, or the movable accessory 175. is there. The effect control CPU 120 can cause the effect device to initially operate in a predetermined operation pattern by executing an effect control pattern including an operation pattern of an initial operation of the effect device. The plurality of operation patterns of the initial operation can be realized by preparing a plurality of effect control patterns for executing the initial operation and selecting a predetermined effect control pattern from the plurality of effect control patterns. . The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be designated based on the EXT data XX of the initialization designation command E0XXH, for example. The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be selected based on a predetermined condition by the effect control CPU 120 that has received the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed in which the operation content is determined by receiving an operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the operation effective period, which is an operation effective period. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to operate the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 in a manner specified by the movable combination control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, Control of the movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, etc.) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value that is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data configuring the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number is provided. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notifying command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effects related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  First, the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIG. 11, when the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The CPU 103) starts a main process after step S001 after executing a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S001). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S002), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S003). Then, the RAM 102 is set in an accessible state (step S005). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch input via the input port of the I / O 105 is in an on state (step S006). The clear switch is mounted on a power supply board, for example. When the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is in the on state (step S007; YES), the CPU 103 executes a normal initialization process (steps S010 to S014).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is not in the on state (step S007; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008). The processing at the time of power supply stop means the state of the gaming machine 1 to restore the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the internal state of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Data protection processing for temporarily backing up the data. Data backup is performed, for example, by storing data to be protected in a storage area (backup RAM area) of the RAM 102 to which power is supplied from a backup power source. Data backup may be performed by saving data in the backup RAM area when it is detected that power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped. Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area can be determined by, for example, the presence or absence of a backup flag that is set when data is backed up. Further, the determination can be made based on whether or not parity data is added to the backup RAM area. When it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed (step S008; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008; YES), the CPU 103 performs a parity check on the backup data stored in the backup RAM area, and whether the check result is OK. Is determined (step S009). In the process of step S009, the checksum calculated from the data stored in the RAM 102 when the power supply is stopped is compared with the checksum calculated and stored from the data backed up in the power supply stop process. The check result is judged based on the agreement between the two. If the power supply stop process is correctly performed, the checksum stored in the backup RAM area matches the checksum calculated from the data stored in the backup RAM area after the power supply is started. On the other hand, if the power supply stop process is not performed correctly, the two checksums do not match. The fact that the parity check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped. When the parity check result is not OK (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing that is executed when the power is turned on, which is not recovery by the power supply stop processing (step S010 to step S014).

  On the other hand, when the parity check result is OK (step S009; YES), the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (the processes of steps S41 to S44) for returning the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Do. In step S41, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S41), and sequentially sets the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S41). Step S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing in steps S41 and S42, the stored data remains as it is in the part of the work area that is not initialized. The part that is not initialized includes, for example, data indicating a gaming state at the time of stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  After executing the process of step S42, the CPU 103 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S43), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup command transmission table in the work area (in the RAM 102). The command stored in the backup command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S43, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (9200H) as an initialization designation command at the time of power supply restoration (step S44). The CPU 103 may transmit the data backed up in the backup RAM area together with a power failure recovery designation command. Examples of the command to be transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command include the variable display result command (8CXXH), the symbol confirmation command (8F00), the game state designation command (95XX), the hit start designation command (A0XX), which are described in FIG. These are a notification of opening the winning opening (A1XX), a notification after opening of the large winning opening (A2XX), a time-count specification command (B3XX), a probability variation number specification command (B4XX), and the like. By transmitting these commands together with the power failure recovery designation command, it is possible to recover the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped. Receiving the power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process may include an initial operation of the rendering device. After executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S015.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the clear switch is in the ON state (step S007; YES), when it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed in the process of step S008 (step S008; NO), or step S009. When it is determined that the parity check result is not OK in the process (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S010). The data stored in the RAM 102 is initialized by the RAM clear process. The data to be initialized is, for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for determining per symbol. Data initialization sets the data value to 0, but a predetermined initial value may be set as the data, for example. Also, initialization is performed on the entire storage area of the RAM 102. However, only a predetermined storage area of the RAM 102 may be initialized. The area not initialized may be, for example, an area in which data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determination per ordinary symbol is stored.

  After executing the process of step S010, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S011), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the initial values of the work area. (Step S012). By the processing in steps S011 and S012, for example, initial values are set for a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 set in the game control flag setting unit 152. The In addition, initial values are set for various timers set in the game control timer setting unit 153 and used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. In addition, an initial value is set for a counter for counting a count value that is set for the game control counter setting unit 154 and is used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, initial values are set for various buffers that are set in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1.

  After executing the processing of step S012, the CPU 103 sets the address of the initialization command transmission table in the pointer (step S013), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization command transmission table in the work area (area in the RAM 102). The command stored in the initialization command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S013, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted) such as the effect control board 12 (a microcomputer for game control). 100 notifies the sub-board that the initialization process has been executed, and the sub-board transmits a command for designating the execution of the initialization process to the sub-board (step S014). The CPU 103 may designate a target for executing the initialization process in the EXT data of the initialization designation command. For example, CPU 103 may specify an effect control pattern for selecting an initial operation of the effect device in the EXT data. Further, the CPU 103 may directly designate the initial operation of the effect device such as the image display device 5 or the movable accessory 173 in the EXT data. When receiving the initialization designation command, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the initial operation of the presentation device based on the initialization designation command.

  After executing the process of step S014 or after executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S015). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update a random value within a predetermined range of random numbers.

  Furthermore, in step S015, the CPU 103 sets a game control timer register so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a CTC (counter / timer circuit). As the game control timer, a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 can be used.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S010 to S016) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the initial value random number update process (step S018) and the display random number update process (step S019) in the main process. When the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, an interrupt prohibition process is executed (step S017), and an interrupt process by the game control timer is prohibited. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, an interrupt permission process is executed (step S020), and the interrupt disabled state is released. In the present embodiment, the display random number for which update processing is executed in step S019 is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit, or whether to reach when it is not a big hit It is a random number to do. In the display random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated. The initial value random number for which update processing is executed in step S018 is a count of a counter (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol. This is a random number for determining the initial value. In the initial value random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number is updated. Above, description of the main process using FIG. 11 is complete | finished.

  Next, the game control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to enable transmission of the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated. This is the end of the description of the game control timer interrupt process using FIG.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start winning process executed in steps S208 and S211 of the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S201; YES), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES). After executing the processing of step S209, the second start port switch is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not 22B is in an ON state (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; YES), the second special figure reservation memory number (second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process is performed. Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  The CPU 103 is updated so as to add 1 to the number of reserved special figure storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, as the start winning time process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is executed by, for example, executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. To the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is executed by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. To the effect control board 12.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A gaming state is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, for example, by confirming the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state, for example, when the probability variation flag is in the on state, depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state or the off state. If the probability variation flag is in the off state, the low probability state is identified. In other words, the CPU 103 specifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing in step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 15 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of step S402 are set. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; NO), or after any of the processing of step S410 is executed, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and their determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403) or a stored memory number (for example, a stored value of a first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table is selected based on a certain first stored memory count value or the like. Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variable category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 18A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 18B is a configuration example of the variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 18C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 18D is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 18A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 18B to 18D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 17 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  FIG. 18A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (a variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B), a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, among 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3, 0 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 18A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 18B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 18C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determination values of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 18C, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category. “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 18D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, compared to when the number of reserved memories is small, shortening / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the super reach (losing) fluctuation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 18A to 18C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after performing the setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 16B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 13, the CPU 103 selects any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category stored in step S218 of the start winning process, similarly to step S412 of the winning random number determination process. Subsequently, based on the variation category as the determination result, one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted and stored in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, and stored in the variation pattern setting process in step S111. The variation pattern may be determined using the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern stored in the time process.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state. If the jackpot flag is in an on state, the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. Updated to When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “16R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type “16R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening of the winning prize opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, the normal open big hit state may be set. On the other hand, corresponding to the jackpot type “8R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “8 times” so that the normal open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, and the movable accessory 175. Processing to wait until the waiting time corresponding to the period to be passed, and after-hit gaming state transition processing to be described later for setting to start probability variation control and time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc. It is included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S <b> 231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; NO), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of first special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; NO), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. The data of the display result determination table is set (step S239) in the same manner as the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the decided values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). And when it determines with it being a "hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the big hit type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is set to “16R probability variable big hit” and “8R probability variable big hit”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to the jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be made (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, the big hit type buffer value may be “1” if the big hit type is “16R probability variable big hit”, and “2” if the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a “hit” (step S241; NO) or after performing any of the processes in step S245, the result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, if the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined in the same manner as the winning random number determination process (step S220). However, when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and the variation pattern setting is performed. In the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. 18, even if the number of reserved memories differs greatly from the time of execution of the process (step S111), it is extracted at the time of winning a prize. If the random number MR3 is “99”, for example, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 20A shows an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 20B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 20C is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 20D to 20H.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (step S291). If the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start production waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process during variation (step S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” that is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing gaming state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the changing gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low-probability low-base state (step S451). CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. If it is determined in step S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the changing gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low-probability / low-base state is not established (step S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of times of execution of the special figure game for executing the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The ST number (probability variation number) and the time reduction number are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 13 and 23).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S452, the CPU 103 reads the number of STs (the number of probability changes) (step S453) and reads the number of time reductions (step S454). Subsequent to the processing in step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (step S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. If it is determined in step S455 that the current gaming state is a highly probable state (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 indicates that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count) read in step S453. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. For example, the gaming state is set to a low probability state by turning it off (step S457), and the probability variation control is terminated.

  After executing the process of step S457, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state (step S455; NO), the value of the variation counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count). If it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (time-short state) (step S458). When the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time reduction state). When it is determined in step S458 that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the short time number read in step S454. It is determined whether the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S459). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and enters the off state. For example, the gaming state is set to a low base state (step S460), and the time-shortening control is terminated.

  After the process of step S460, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S458; NO), the value of the variation counter is indicated by the short time number and is not greater than the value. (Step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state has become a low probability low base state (step S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in step S461 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to “0” (step S462), and sets the time-saving count. The value is cleared to “0” (step S463), the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (step S464), and the variation gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S461 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S461; NO), the variation gaming state transition process is terminated without executing steps S462, S463, and S464.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 23, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has passed may be determined according to whether or not.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high probability state (probability change state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high base state (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to a highly accurate and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to “0” (step S318), and ends the big hit ending process.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) and the setting value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in step S403 or the like is performed (step S410), and the variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in step S412 Is set for transmitting (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221). After these processes are executed, a command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is executed, so that the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) is set. When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, Four commands, ie, a variable category command and a pending storage count notification command (a first pending storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing in step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. After these processes are executed, the variable control result notification command and the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command or the like is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is performed, and the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” to control the big hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are determined. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) determines “big hit”. Determination of whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, determination of a general variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative design, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by each presentation control command are transmitted to the presentation control board 12 Is done.

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), in the big hit end processing of step S117, the ST number (number of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are both 70 times. Set to state. In addition, the variation counter is counted up in each variation when the gaming state is the high-probability base state (step S452), and the gaming state is in the low-probability state when the variation counter exceeds the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S457), and the gaming state is set to a low base when the variation counter exceeds the number of time reductions (step S460).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71). At the initialization station, the production control CPU 120 confirms reception of the initialization designation command from the main board 11 described with reference to FIG. 11, and initializes the presentation device based on the initialization designation command. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, the image display device 5 performs an initial screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  After executing the process of step S71, the CPU 120 for effect control clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, sets a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12, and the like. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waited.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, a movable accessory 173, and a drive of the movable accessory 175. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as motion, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; YES), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; YES), a second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning (Step S512), the process returns to Step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any one of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  When it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command. (Step S513). When it is determined that the command is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S514). . After executing the process of step S514, the effect control CPU 120 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  When it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is an initialization designation command (step S515). . If it is determined that the command is an initialization designation command (step S515; YES), the production control CPU 120 stores the initialization designation command in an initialization designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S516). After executing the process of step S516, the CPU 120 for effect control returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  If it is determined in step S515 that the received command is not an initialization designation command (step S515; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings according to the other received commands (step S517). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may identify the current gaming state by analyzing the gaming state designation command. When the received command is a hit end designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the hit end designation command and specify whether or not the time is short. When the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may store the power failure recovery designation command in a power failure restoration designation command storage area formed in the RAM. After executing the process of step S517, the effect control CPU 120 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When receiving commands are sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area. Above, description of command analysis processing using FIG. 25 is complete | finished.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). , A process for determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command is received as a received command, and a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additionally displaying in the start winning memory display area 5H are determined. The process to perform is performed.

  After executing the winning effect determination process in step S150, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable accessory initial operation process (step S151). Details of the movable accessory initial operation process in step S151 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, one of the following processes of steps S170 to 177 is performed. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5, processing for displaying processing for executing demonstration effects (customer waiting demonstration display), and the like. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, the process of determining the fixed decorative design according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted and activated. Including a process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a process for determining various effects (for example, main notice effect), and the like. Yes. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the read control data (process data) and outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and displays it on the screen. Control to output to the substrate 13 and output the production sound from the speaker 8, control to output the illumination signal to the lamp control substrate 14 to turn on / off / flash the lamp 9, driving of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 Various production control such as control is executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed completely stopped. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This waiting process per special figure includes a process of counting the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions, a process of updating the value of the production number counter, and a process of changing the gaming state according to the value of the production number counter. Can include. In this special symbol waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to “4” when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, and the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol. In this case, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot start process is executed before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, and a fanfare effect is performed, or an effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened) (for example, This includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This in-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) For example, an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, or the like) is set. It includes processing to do. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. When a special winning opening releasing notification command is received from the main board 11, an effect to be executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The effect process flag value is updated to “5”. When a hit end designation command is received from the main board 11, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7”.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This post-hit processing is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the processing for executing the ending effect, the processing for setting the gaming state, the ST number (the number of times of probability change), and the number of time reductions are set. Processing to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, using FIG. 27, the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151 in the effect control process process (step S75) of FIG. 26 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the movable accessory initial operation process.

  In the movable action initial operation process of FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 stores the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command in the initialization designation command storage area or the power failure restoration command storage area formed in the RAM 122. It is determined whether or not (step S1511). The initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is stored in the initialization designation command or the power failure restoration designation command stored in the initialization designation command storage area or the power failure restoration command storage area in step S516 or step S517 described in FIG. If it is determined that it has not been performed (step S1511; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the movable accessory initialization process of step S151.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is stored (step S1511; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171A is in the on state (step S1512). ). The origin sensor 171A is a sensor that detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the rotation direction.

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is on (step S1512; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is on (step S1513). The origin sensor 171B is a sensor that detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the opening / closing direction.

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the ON state (step S1513; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs a process for executing the initial operation A (step S1514). That is, the initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are on. For example, the initial operation A is set by an effect control pattern, and the effect control CPU 120 may perform a process for executing the initial operation A by selecting the effect control pattern in which the initial operation A is set. . It should be noted that the initial operation B to the initial operation D, which will be described later, may be set to the effect control pattern selected by the effect control CPU 120 as in the case of the initial operation A.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (step S1513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation B (step S1515). That is, the initial operation B is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is on and the origin sensor 171B is off.

  In the process of step S1512, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is not in the on state (step S1512; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S1516).

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the ON state (step S1516; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation C (step S1517). That is, the initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is in an off state and the origin sensor 171B is in an on state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (step S1513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation D (step S1518). That is, the initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are off.

  After executing the process of step S1514, step S1515, step S1517, or step S1518, the effect control CPU 120 ends the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151.

  It is assumed that the initial (initial) operation of the movable accessory 173 and the like described in this embodiment includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 or the like is operated in the same manner as a normal performance operation. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to check whether or not a defect occurs in the movable accessory 173 or the like in the normal performance operation. On the other hand, the short initial operation is an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 or the like is operated while omitting a part of the normal performance operation. By performing the short initial operation, it is possible to check the operation of the movable accessory 173 and the like in a shorter time than when performing the long initial operation. In the present embodiment, the initial operation A to the initial operation D will be described as performing the initial operation in the short initial operation. However, the initial operation A to the initial operation D may be a long initial operation. Further, the initial operation A to the initial operation D may perform an initial operation that combines a short initial operation and a long initial operation. Details of the initial operation A to the initial operation D will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 47. This is the end of the description of the movable accessory initial operation process using FIG.

  Next, the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first change start command (or a second change start command) has been received (step S1000).

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has not been received (step S1000; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1002). The demonstration effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration performance flag is on (for example, the value “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration performance flag is off (for example, the value “0”). Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

  When it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (step S1004). If it is determined in step S1004 that no customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1004 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; YES), the demonstration effect flag is set to ON (step S1006), and the demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display) is set. Process data (effect control pattern) is selected (step S1008), and an effect control process timer is started (step S1010). Thereby, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is started. Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 as a condition for starting the demonstration presentation has been described. The conditions are not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in a gaming state by a sensor or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1002; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation (for example, stick controller 31A). Or a predetermined operation using the push button 31B or the like) is determined (step S1012). When it is determined in step S1012 that there is no predetermined operation (step S1012; NO), the production control CPU 120 executes an initial operation execution process during the demonstration (step S1014). Details of the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display start waiting process in step S170. That is, when a predetermined operation using the stick controller 31A or the like is not performed during the demonstration production, the demonstration production is continued.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (step S1012; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes menu processing (step S1013). The menu processing in step S1013 displays a menu on the image display device 5 and allows the player to perform an operation according to the menu contents. After executing the process of step S1013, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display start waiting process of step S170.

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or second variation start command) has been received (step S1000; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1022). If it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1022; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (step S1024). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1026).

  After executing the process of step S1026, the CPU 120 for effect control turns off the initial operation executed flag (step S1027). The initial operation executed flag is a flag that is turned on when the initial operation is executed in the process of step S1014. When the variable display start waiting process of step S170 is ended, When the demonstration effect is executed, the initial operation of the movable accessory 173 or the like can be executed again. After executing the process of step S1027, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display start waiting process of step S170.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1022; NO), the process of step S1024 is omitted (skip), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the variable display start setting process. After the updated value is updated to “1” (step S1026), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. Above, description of the variable display start waiting process of step S170 using FIG. 28 is complete | finished.

  Next, the details of the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) in FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration. The movable accessory initial operation process of step S151 described with reference to FIG. 27 is executed when an initialization specifying command or a power failure recovery specifying command is received from the main board 11, whereas the step described with reference to FIG. The initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014 is executed while the gaming machine 1 is in the demonstration. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the initial operation is performed at the timing when the power is turned on and other timings is illustrated. Accordingly, it is possible to check the malfunction of the movable accessory 173 and the like except when the power is turned on, and to return to the origin position even when the movable accessory 173 and the like are not at the origin position.

  In the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initial operation execution completion flag is on (step S10141). During the demonstration production, the initial operation is performed only once. The initial operation executed flag is a flag indicating that the initial operation has been performed in the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 when the gaming machine 1 starts the demonstration effect. Therefore, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is on (step S10141; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014. As described above, the initial operation executed flag is turned off in the process of step S1027 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is not in the on state (step S10141; NO), the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial operation executed flag to the on state (step S10143). The initial operation executed flag may be recorded, for example, in the effect control data holding area 190 described with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S10142, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin sensor A is in an on state (step S10143). When it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is on (step S10143; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is on (step S10144).

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S10144; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation A (step S10145). On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (step S1513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation B (step S1515).

  In the process of step S10143, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is not in the on state (step S10143; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S10147). When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the ON state (step S10147; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation C (step S10148). On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the on state (step S10147; NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for executing the initial operation D (step S10149). That is, the initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are on. The initial operation B is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is on and the origin sensor 171B is off. The initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is in an off state and the origin sensor 171B is in an on state. Furthermore, the initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are in the OFF state.

  After executing the process of step S10145, step S10146, step S10148, or step S10149, the effect control CPU 120 ends the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of step S1014.

  In the present embodiment, the initial operation A to the initial operation D in FIG. 29 are exemplified as the same operations as the initial operation A to the initial operation D in FIG. However, the initial operation performed in FIG. 29 may be different from the initial operations A to D in FIG. This is the end of the description of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration using FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 120 for effect control displays effect symbols according to the variation pattern designation command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the variable display result notification command storage area (that is, the received variable display result notification command). A result (stop symbol) is determined (step S8002). If the pseudo-ream is specified by the change pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. In addition, a combination of symbols that are not reachable but one big symbol and one symbol are shifted, or a combination of symbols including a special image that is not normally displayed (an image other than a number may be used). Also called “design”. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern designation command, and determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern designation command. Also good.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable accessory notice effect, an effect feather feature notice effect, etc.) in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the effect symbol. It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the notification effect setting process and to set the effect mode of the notification effect (step S8003).

  The movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 operates independently as a movable accessory announcement effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “object effect”) using the movable accessory (movable accessory 173, movable accessory 175). Single operation effect (also referred to as “single role effect”) and a linked operation effect (also referred to as “linked role effect”) in which the movable role 173 and the movable role 175 are operated in conjunction with each other are provided. As the single role effect, the first single role effect to the third single role effect in which only the movable role 173 is operated, and the fourth single role effect in which only the movable role 175 is operated. Details of the operation mode in each accessory effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S8003, specifically, for the movable accessory announcement effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “actual effect production”) using the movable combination (movable combination 173, movable combination 175), the combination shown in FIG. The notice effect setting process is performed using the object effect execution lottery table.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an accessory effect execution lottery table. In the character effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 31, depending on the variable display result (big hit, reach out, non-reach out), whether or not the movable character advance effect is executed, and the type of the movable object advance effect when executing Although the corresponding determination value is assigned, the example shown in FIG. 31 shows the ratio of the assigned determination value in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the effect effect execution lottery, and determines the decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the variable display result is a big hit (when a variation pattern designation command indicating a big hit is received), the first single actor effect is executed at a rate of 5/100. 2) Executing the single individual effect effect is that executing the third single character effect at a rate of 15/100, executing the third single character effect at a rate of 20/100, It is determined that executing the linked role effect at the rate of 20/100 and not executing the role announcement effect at the rate of 20/100.

  In addition, for example, when the variable display result is reach loss (when a variation pattern designation command indicating reach loss is received), executing the first single accessory effect at a ratio of 20/100 is 15/100. Executing the second single role effect at a rate of 10/100, executing the third single role effect at a rate of 10/100, executing the third single role effect at a rate of 10/100, It is determined that the interlocked-effects effect is executed at a rate of 5/100 and that the accessory-notice effect is not executed at a rate of 40/100.

  Also, for example, when the variable display result is non-reach loss (when a variation pattern designation command indicating non-reach deviation is received), it is determined not to execute the accessory announcement effect at a ratio of 100/100. That is, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the accessory announcement effect can be executed only when the reach is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the accessory announcement effect can be executed even when the reach is not reached. It is good as well.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect when executing the variation pattern or the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable accessory control data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are operated by controlling the driving means (actuator) corresponding to each combination in the manner set in the movable combination control data. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the notice effect, and when executing the notice effect, the process table corresponding to the notice effect is selected in step S8004.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, the production control CPU 120 performs the production device (the image display device as the production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable accessory control data 1). 5. Control of the various lamps as the production parts, the speaker 8 as the production parts, and the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 as the production parts is executed (step S8006). For example, control data for displaying an image corresponding to the variation pattern in the image display device 5 is output to the effect display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speaker 8. Further, in order to operate the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175, a control signal (movable combination control data) is output to the movable combination control device 17.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the effect symbols are variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern designation command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern designation command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step S8008).

  Next, the first effect operation to the fifth effect operation using at least one of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35. The first effect operation is an operation performed in the first single actor effect, the second effect operation is an operation performed in the second single character effect, and the third effect operation is the third single character effect. The fourth effect operation is an operation performed in the fourth single actor effect, and the fifth effect operation is an operation performed in the linked character effect.

  First, with reference to FIG. 32, the first effect operation (the operation in the first single actor effect) using the movable accessory 173 in the normal effect will be described. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first effect operation using the movable accessory 173. 32 (A) to 32 (E) are time-series explanations of rendering operations that cause the movable accessory 173 to operate using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 32 (A), the decorative symbols being variably displayed are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the movable accessory 173 stops at the origin position at the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 1, it is assumed that the player can visually recognize a part of the movable accessory 173 at the origin position. The movable member 173 has a split piece 173B1, a split piece 173B2, and a split piece 173B3. The split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are combined to form a predetermined figure (in a closed state). It shall be. It is assumed that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position above the image display device 5 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 32 (B), the decorative symbol “7” is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, indicating that it is in the reach state. The movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 with the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 closed, and the decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display is displayed. Hide the decorative pattern.

  Next, in FIG. 32C, in the movable accessory 173, the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are opened by the actuator 172B at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. In order to open the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3, a predetermined space required when the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are opened is required. is there. When the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position shown in FIG. 32A, since there is no predetermined space, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 cannot be opened. That is, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 can be opened only when the movable accessory 173 is at the position shown in FIG. By opening the split piece 173B2 and the split piece 173B3, the decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display can be visually recognized by the player. FIG. 32C illustrates a case where a predetermined effect symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5C during variable display.

  Next, in FIG. 32D, in the movable accessory 173, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 are closed by the actuator 172B at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. When the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are closed, the symbol display area 5C during variable display is hidden again, and the player cannot see it.

  Next, in FIG. 32E, the movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A and returned to the original position while the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are closed. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, although FIG. 32E illustrates the case where the final stop symbol is a big hit, the final stop symbol may be a big hit or lost. Above, description of the 1st effect | action operation | movement using the movable accessory 173 in a normal effect using FIG. 32 is complete | finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the second presentation operation using the movable accessory 173 in the normal production (operation in the second single actor production) and the third production operation (operation in the third single production production). ). FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of the second and third effect operations using the movable accessory 173. 33 (A) to 33 (E) are time-series explanations of performance operations for operating the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. In FIG. 33, FIG. 33 (C1) shows the second effect operation using the movable accessory 173, and FIG. 33 (C2) shows the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173. Is. Note that the second and third effect operations using the movable accessory 173 described with reference to FIG. 33 are shown in FIG. 33A, FIG. 33B, and FIG. 32 (A), FIG. 32 (B), and FIG. 32 (D) of the first effect operation described above are respectively the same effect modes, and therefore a part of the description will be omitted in the following description.

  In FIG. 33 (A), the decorative symbols being variably displayed are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. 33A, the movable accessory 173 stops at the origin position. The split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 of the movable accessory 173 are in a closed state.

  Next, in FIG. 33 (B), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed. The movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 with the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 closed, and the decorative symbol display area during variable display is displayed. Hide the 5C decorative pattern.

  Next, in FIG. 33 (C1), the movable accessory 173 moves laterally from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the left side in the figure by the actuator 172C. The movable accessory 173 moved in the horizontal direction hides the decorative symbol display area 5L and displays the decorative symbol display area 5C so as to be visible to the player. That is, in the second effect operation using the movable accessory 173, it is assumed that an effect operation accompanied by lateral movement in the left direction of the movable accessory 173 is performed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 33 (C2), the movable accessory 173 moves laterally from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the right side in the figure by the actuator 172C. The movable accessory 173 moved in the horizontal direction hides the decorative symbol display area 5R and displays the decorative symbol display area 5C so that the player can visually recognize it. That is, in the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173, it is assumed that an effect operation accompanied by lateral movement in the right direction of the movable accessory 173 is performed.

  The second effect operation and the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173 are executed when any one of the effect operations is selected, and the second effect operation and the third effect operation are performed. It shall not be executed at the same time. Further, in FIGS. 33C1 and 33C2, the case where the decorative symbol display area 5C that is variably displayed is simply displayed as the movable accessory 173 moves laterally is illustrated. A specific effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 along with the lateral movement of 173.

  Next, in FIG. 33D, the movable accessory 173 is returned to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 from the position shown in FIG. 33C1 or 33C2 by the actuator 172C. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, the symbol display area 5C during variable display is hidden again.

  Next, in FIG. 33E, the movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A and returned to the origin position. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. This is the end of the description of the second effect operation and the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173 in the normal effect using FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175 in the normal effect (an operation in the fourth independent character effect) will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of the fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175. 34 (A) to 34 (C) are time-series explanations of presentation operations for operating the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 34 (A), the decorative symbols being variably displayed are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. In the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. 34A, the movable accessory 173 is stopped at the origin position. It is assumed that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position above the image display device 5 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 34 (B), the decorative symbol “7” is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, indicating that it is in the reach state. The movable accessory 175 is lowered from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the actuator 172C. The lowered movable accessory 175 hides the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display.

  Next, in FIG. 34C, the movable accessory 175 is raised by the actuator 172C and returned to the origin position. When the movable accessory 175 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. This is the end of the description of the fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175 in the normal effect using FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the fifth effect operation (operation in the linked character effect) using the movable character 173 and the movable character 175 in the normal effect will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of the fifth effect operation using the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175. 35 (A) to 35 (C) are time-series explanations of performance operations for operating the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, and the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 35 (A), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol being variably displayed is displayed. In the lower left portion of the image display device 5 in FIG. 35A, the movable accessory 173 is stopped at the origin position. The movable member 173 has a split piece 173B1, a split piece 173B2, and a split piece 173B3. The split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are combined to form a predetermined figure (in a closed state). It shall be. It is assumed that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position above the image display device 5 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 35B, the decorative symbol “7” is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, indicating that the reach state is reached. The movable accessory 175 is rotated by the actuator 172A to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 with the split pieces 173B1, 173B2, and split pieces 173B3 closed, and the decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display is displayed. Hide the decorative pattern. In addition, the movable object 175 is moved a plurality of times (for example, three times) by the actuator 172C, after being lowered by a small distance from the origin position and then returned to the origin position again.

  Next, in FIG. 35C, the image display device 5 displays an image 200 indicating that the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 in operation are operating integrally. This suggests to the player that the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are linked in one production. Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, the movable accessory 175 is raised by the actuator 172C and returned to the original position, and the movable accessory 173 remains in the closed state with the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 closed. Then, it is rotated by the actuator 172A and returned to the origin position. By returning each movable accessory to the origin position, a final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, a specific description is omitted, but the initial operation corresponding to the fifth effect operation can be executed in the same manner as the initial operation corresponding to the first effect operation to the fourth effect operation. It is good also as being.

  Next, details of the actuator A and the actuator C that operate the movable accessory 173 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the actuator A and the actuator C that operate the movable accessory. In FIG. 36, the movable accessory 173 has movable mechanisms such as a rotation mechanism 173A and a slide mechanism 173C.

  First, the rotation operation of the movable accessory 173 by the rotation mechanism 173A will be described. The rotation mechanism 173A is rotated by the actuator 172A. The position shown in FIG. 36A is the origin position of the rotation mechanism 173A rotated by the actuator 172A. The origin position (a) of the rotation mechanism 173A is detected by the origin sensor 171A. The origin sensor 171A can detect that the rotating rotation mechanism 173A returns to the original position by detecting a part of the rotation mechanism 173A, for example.

  The movable accessory 173 at the origin position (a) is moved clockwise in the drawing to the position shown in FIG. 36 (b) shown by a broken line by the turning mechanism 173A rotated by the actuator 172A. The rotation mechanism 173A rotated to the position shown in FIG. 36B is locked so as not to rotate any more, for example, by a mechanical locking member (not shown).

  36 (a) is the position of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIG. 32 (A). 36A is the lower left position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 32A. 36 (b) is the position of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIG. 32 (B). That is, the position shown in FIG. 36B is the position of the central portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG.

  The actuator 172A rotates the rotation mechanism 173A between the origin position shown in FIG. 36 (a) and the position shown in FIG. 36 (b). For example, the effect control CPU 120 can control the actuator 172A so as to perform an effect operation in which the rotation mechanism 173A is simply reciprocated between the origin position shown in FIG. 36A and the position shown in FIG. . Further, the effect control CPU 120 may control the actuator 172A to perform an effect operation in which the rotation mechanism 173A reciprocates a plurality of times between the origin position in FIG. 36A and the position in FIG. Good. The effect control CPU 120 may perform a plurality of effect operations by changing the number of times and the speed of rotating the rotation mechanism 173A. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may selectively execute a strong operation for quickly rotating the rotation mechanism 173A multiple times and a weak operation for slowly rotating the rotation mechanism 173A once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the rotation mechanism 173A using the actuator 172A and the origin sensor 171A to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the rotation mechanism 173A is a position where the rotation mechanism 173A is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 36 and the origin sensor 171A is first turned on. For example, when the origin sensor 171A is in the on state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the actuator 172A in the clockwise direction in FIG. 36 until the origin sensor 171A is in the off state, and then turns the actuator 172A in the opposite direction. When the origin sensor 171A is turned on by rotating clockwise, the rotation mechanism 173A is returned to the origin position by stopping the actuator 172A. When the origin sensor 171A is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 rotates the actuator 172A counterclockwise to stop the actuator 172A when the origin sensor 171A is in the on state. The rotation mechanism 173A is returned to the origin position. In the present embodiment, even if the rotation mechanism 173A rotates further counterclockwise from the origin position before returning to the origin, the rotation is mechanically locked and the origin sensor 171A is turned on. Shall be maintained.

  Next, the sliding operation of the movable accessory 173 by the slide mechanism 173C will be described. The slide mechanism 173C is slid in the lateral direction by the actuator 172C. 36 (b) is the origin position of the slide mechanism 173C slid by the actuator 172C. That is, the actuator 172C can slide in the lateral direction when the actuator 172A rotates clockwise and is in the position (b). The origin position (b) of the slide mechanism 173C is detected by the origin sensor 171C. The origin sensor 171C may detect the position of the slide mechanism 173C in the lateral direction by detecting, for example, a detection plate provided in the slide mechanism 173C.

  The movable accessory 173 at the position shown in FIG. 36 (a) is laterally shown by the slide mechanism 173C slid by the actuator 172C up to the position shown in FIG. 36 (c1) or (c2) indicated by a broken line. Moved to. The slide mechanism 173C slid to the position shown in FIG. 36 (c1) or (c2) is locked so as not to slide any more by, for example, a mechanical locking member (not shown). The position shown in FIG. 36 (c1) is the position on the left side of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 33 (C1). 36 (c2) is a position on the right side of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 33 (C2).

  The actuator 172C slides the slide mechanism 173C between the position shown in FIG. 36B and the position shown in FIG. 36C1 or C2. For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the actuator 172C so as to perform an effect operation in which the slide mechanism 173C is simply reciprocated from the position shown in FIG. 36B to the position shown in FIG. 36C1 or FIG. Can do. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the actuator 172C to perform an effect operation in which the slide mechanism 173C is reciprocated a plurality of times between the position (c1) or (c2) illustrated in FIG. May be. The production control CPU 120 may perform a plurality of production operations by changing the number and speed of sliding the slide mechanism 173C. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may selectively execute a strong operation of quickly sliding the slide mechanism 173C a plurality of times and a weak operation of slowly sliding the slide mechanism 173C once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the slide mechanism 173C using the actuator 172C and the origin sensor 171C to the origin position will be described. It is assumed that the origin position of the slide mechanism 173C is a position where the slide mechanism 173C slides to the right in FIG. 36 and the origin sensor 171C is first turned on. For example, when the origin sensor 171C is on before returning to the origin, the effect control CPU 120 slides the actuator 172C to the left in FIG. 36 until the origin sensor 171C is turned off, and then moves the actuator 172C to the right. When the origin sensor 171C is turned on, the actuator 172C is stopped to return the slide mechanism 173C to the origin position. When the origin sensor 171C is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 slides the actuator 172C to the right and stops the actuator 172C when the origin sensor 171C is in the on state. The mechanism 173C is returned to the origin position. However, if the slide mechanism 173C is on the right side of the origin sensor 171C before the origin return, the origin sensor 171C is not turned on even if the actuator 172C is slid rightward. If the origin sensor 171C is not turned on within a predetermined time, the actuator 172C is slid to the left to confirm that the origin sensor 171C is turned on, and then the origin sensor 171C is turned on before the origin return described above. The slide mechanism 173C may be returned to the origin position by an operation when the state is in the state.

  Note that the rotation mechanism 173A may be disposed on the back side of the image display device 5, and move and move the movable accessory 173 from the back side of the image display device 5 with a magnet or the like. By disposing the rotation mechanism 173A on the back side of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the rotation mechanism 173A from obstructing the display screen of the image display device 5. Note that the opening / closing mechanism 173B described with reference to FIG. 37 and the lifting mechanism 173D described with reference to FIG. It may be held and moved by, for example. The description of the details of the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C for operating the movable accessory 173 using FIG.

  Next, details of the actuator 172B that operates the movable accessory 173 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the actuator 172B that operates the movable accessory 173. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 37, the movable accessory 173 has a movable mechanism of an opening / closing mechanism 173B. The opening / closing mechanism 173B is opened / closed by an actuator 172B. FIG. 37A shows that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the closed state, and FIG. 37B shows that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the opened state. The opening / closing mechanism 173B has three split pieces: a split piece 173B1, a split piece 173B2, and a split piece 173B3.

  In the upper diagram of FIG. 37A, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 are combined in a closed state to form a predetermined shape. In FIG. 37 (A), the actuator 172B has a rotating circular gear (pinion), and is a chopped flat plate (rack) connected to each of the split pieces 173B1, 173B2, and 173B3. Are meshed with the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13. The position in FIG. 37A is the origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B that is opened and closed by the actuator 172B. The origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is detected by the origin sensor 171B. The origin sensor 171B can detect that the opening / closing mechanism 173B to be opened / closed is the origin position in the closed state by detecting a part of the rack 173B11.

  37A, when the actuator 172B is driven and the pinion rotates counterclockwise in the figure, the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 meshing with the pinion linearly in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. Moving. The rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 move linearly in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, so that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the open state shown in FIG.

  The lower part of FIG. 37B shows a state where the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 have moved in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. At this time, the split pieces 173B1, split pieces 173B2, and split pieces 173B3 respectively connected to the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 are separated from each other as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. Become. As shown in FIG. 32C, it is assumed that the center portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 is visible by opening the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3. When the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the open state, the origin sensor 171B is in the off state.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the opening / closing mechanism 173B using the actuator 172B and the origin sensor 171B to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is a position where the origin sensor 171B is first turned on when the rack 173B11 of the opening / closing mechanism 173B rotates in the upward direction of FIG. For example, when the origin sensor 171B is in the on state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 drives the actuator 172B until the origin sensor 171B is in the off state and rotates the pinion in the clockwise direction shown in FIG. Next, the actuator 172B is driven to rotate the pinion counterclockwise, and when the origin sensor 171B is turned on, the actuator 172B is stopped to return the opening / closing mechanism 173B to the origin position. When the origin sensor 171B is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 drives the actuator 172B to rotate the pinion clockwise to turn the origin sensor 171B on. Is stopped to return the opening / closing mechanism 173B to the origin position. In this embodiment, even when the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in a state of being further closed from the origin position before returning to the origin, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 are brought into contact with each other and locked. The origin sensor 171B is assumed to be kept on. Above, description of the detail of the actuator 172B which operates the movable accessory 173 using FIG. 37 is complete | finished.

  Next, details of the actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of an actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175. As illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 38, the movable accessory 175 has a movable mechanism of an elevating mechanism 173D. The lifting mechanism 173D is lifted and lowered by the actuator 172D. The movable accessory 175 in the position shown in FIG. 38A is moved in the vertical direction in the drawing to the position shown in FIG. 38B shown by a broken line by the lifting mechanism 173D that is lifted and lowered by the actuator 172D. The raising / lowering mechanism 173D lowered to the position shown in FIG. 38 (b) is locked so as not to be lowered further by, for example, a mechanical locking member (not shown). The position shown in FIG. 38B is the center position of the display screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG.

  The actuator 172D moves the lifting mechanism 173D up and down between the position shown in FIG. 38A and the position shown in FIG. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can control the actuator 172D to perform an effect operation in which the elevating mechanism 173D is simply reciprocated between the position illustrated in FIG. 38A and the position illustrated in FIG. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may control the actuator 172D so as to perform an effect operation in which the elevating mechanism 173D reciprocates a plurality of times between the position illustrated in FIG. 38A and the position illustrated in FIG. The production control CPU 120 may perform a plurality of production operations by changing the number of times and the speed at which the elevation mechanism 173D is raised and lowered. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may selectively execute a strong operation of moving the lifting mechanism 173D up and down a plurality of times quickly and a weak operation of moving the lifting mechanism 173D up and down slowly once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the lifting mechanism 173D using the actuator 172D and the origin sensor 171D to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the elevating mechanism 173D is assumed to be a position where the elevating mechanism 173D is moved upward in FIG. 38 and the origin sensor 171D is first turned on. For example, when the origin sensor 171D is on before returning to the origin, the effect control CPU 120 lowers the actuator 172D in the downward direction in FIG. 38 until the origin sensor 171D is turned off, and then raises the actuator 172D. When the origin sensor 171D is turned on by moving the actuator 172D in the direction, the lifting mechanism 173D is returned to the origin position by stopping the actuator 172D. When the origin sensor 171D is in the off state before the origin return, the effect control CPU 120 raises and lowers the actuator 172D by moving the actuator 172D upward and stopping the actuator 172D when the origin sensor 171D is in the on state. The mechanism 173D is returned to the origin position. In the present embodiment, even when the lifting mechanism 173D is further raised from the origin position before returning to the origin, the rise is mechanically locked and the origin sensor 171D is maintained in the ON state. Above, description of the detail of actuator 172D which operates the movable accessory 175 using FIG. 38 is complete | finished.

  Next, a long initial operation that is one of initial operations of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIGS. . As described above, the long initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 and the like are operated in the same manner as a normal performance operation. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to check whether or not a defect occurs in the movable accessory 173 or the like in the normal performance operation. The initial operation is executed subsequent to the operation of returning the origin of each actuator described above. In this embodiment, when a long initial operation is performed as an initial operation, the initial operation is always a constant operation regardless of the origin return operation of the actuator.

  In FIGS. 39 to 47, the operation of the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 is represented by arrows and the drawings are simplified. The arrows shown in FIGS. 39 to 47 indicate the operating ranges of the respective actuators. The solid line arrows exemplify a case where each actuator moves from the origin to the operation end in the initial operation. In addition, the numbers in parentheses starting from (1) illustrated in each figure indicate the order of initial operations.

  First, the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B described in FIG. 39 performs the same operation as the first effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 39 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. 39 (2), the movable accessory 173 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. In order to open the opening / closing mechanism 173B, as described above, the movable accessory 173 needs to be rotated to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is executed at the rotation end even in the initial operation. In FIG. 39 (3), the movable accessory 173 is changed from the open state to the closed state by the opening / closing mechanism 173B. 39 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the long initial operation is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where each actuator is simply reciprocated as described above is exemplified as the long initial operation described with reference to FIGS. However, in the long initial operation, the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 may be operated a plurality of times, for example, in the same manner as the normal performance operation. Further, a predetermined sound effect may be output from the speaker 8 or the lamp 9 may be turned on in accordance with the operation of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175. The description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B using FIG.

  Next, a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C described in FIG. 40 is the same as the second effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 40 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. In FIG. 40 (2), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the left end of the slide by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. In FIG. 40 (3), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the left direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. In FIG. 40 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, and the long initial operation ends. The description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C using FIG.

  Next, a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating another example of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C described in FIG. 41 is the same as the third effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 41 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. 41 (2), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the slide end in the right direction in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. 41 (3), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the right direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. In FIG. 41 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, and the long initial operation ends.

  In the present embodiment, since the long initial operation is intended to check whether or not a malfunction occurs in the movable accessory by the same operation as the normal performance operation, the initial operation described in FIG. It is assumed that the initial operations described in FIG. 41 are performed separately. The description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C using FIG.

  Next, the long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating another example of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D described in FIG. 42 is the same as the fourth effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 42 (1), the movable accessory 175 is lowered from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the lower end by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. In FIG. 42 (2), the movable accessory 175 is raised from the descending end to the origin position by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D, and the long initial operation is completed. Above, description of the long initial operation | movement of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D using FIG. 42 is complete | finished.

  Note that the initial operations described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 may be executed sequentially. The order of initial operations executed at that time is arbitrary. For example, after the initial operation illustrated in FIG. 39 is executed, the initial operation illustrated in FIG. 40, the initial operation illustrated in FIG. 40, and the initial operation illustrated in FIG.

  Next, details of the initial operation A to the initial operation D described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 29 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. The initial operation A to the initial operation D are short initial operations of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator 172D. As described above, the short initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 or the like is operated by omitting a part of the normal performance operation. By performing the short initial operation, it is possible to check the operation of the movable accessory 173 and the like in a shorter time than when performing the long initial operation. In the present embodiment, when the short initial operation is performed as the initial operation, the initial operation is performed in the modes of the initial operation A to the initial operation D according to the mode of the origin return operation of the actuator.

  In FIGS. 43 to 47, arrows when the movable mechanisms move from the origin position to the operating end are indicated by solid lines. Further, an arrow when each movable mechanism moves until the origin sensor that detects each movable mechanism changes from the on state to the off state, and an arrow when the origin sensor moves from the off state to the on state. Is represented by a broken line. The operation in which each movable mechanism moves until the origin sensor that detects each movable mechanism moves from the on state to the off state and then moves until the origin sensor turns on again is referred to as a short initial operation. By performing the short initial operation, the moving distance of the movable mechanism is shortened, and the operation confirmation time can be shortened. Further, the origin return operation when each movable mechanism moves by the origin return operation is indicated by a dotted line with an arrow. Further, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 8 or the lamp 9 is turned on in accordance with the initial operation A to the initial operation D of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 described with reference to FIGS. May be.

  First, the operation of the initial operation A of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation A of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the origin return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B do not perform the origin return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is on and the origin sensor 171B for detecting the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is on before executing the initial operation, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B do not need to perform an origin return operation. However, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are on. Therefore, in the initial operation A, even if the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are in the on state, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are moved to the correct origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation. Can do. 43 to 46, the origin sensor 171D for detecting the origin of the lifting mechanism 173D is in an ON state before the initial operation is performed, and the movable accessory 175 performs the initial operation by the short initial operation. To do.

  43 (1) and (2) shown in FIG. 43, the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by an elevating mechanism 173D operated by an actuator 172D. In FIG. 43 (3), the movable accessory 173 is moved from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, as shown by the solid line in the drawing. It is rotated. In order to open / close the opening / closing mechanism 173B, it is necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end, and therefore the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the short initial operation and rotates to the rotation end. 43 (4) and (5) in FIG. 43, the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. 43 (6), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the initial operation A is completed. Above, description of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement A of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG. 43 is complete | finished.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation B is an initial operation executed when the operation mode of the origin return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the origin return operation and the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is on before executing the initial operation, the rotation mechanism 173A does not need to perform the origin return operation. On the other hand, when the origin sensor 171B that detects the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the OFF state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B needs to perform an origin return operation. The rotation mechanism 173A may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171A is on. Therefore, in the initial operation B, even if the origin sensor 171A is in the ON state, the rotation mechanism 173A can be moved to an accurate origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation. In addition, since the opening / closing mechanism 173B that performs the origin return operation can be moved to the correct origin position by the origin return operation, it is possible to omit the execution of the initial operation and to check the operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B.

  In FIG. 44 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by the dotted line in the drawing by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. 44 (2) and (3) shown in FIG. 44, the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. 44 (4) and (5) shown in FIG. 44, the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. In the initial operation B, since the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the opening operation, it is not necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end. Therefore, the time for checking the operation of the rotation mechanism 173A can be shortened by the short initial operation. The description of the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the home return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A performs the home return operation and the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the home return operation. If the origin sensor 171A that detects the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is in the OFF state before the initial operation is performed, the rotation mechanism 173A needs to perform an origin return operation. On the other hand, when the origin sensor 171B that detects the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the ON state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not need to perform the origin return operation. The opening / closing mechanism 173B may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171B is in the on state. Therefore, in the initial operation C, even when the origin sensor 171B is in the ON state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B can be moved to an accurate origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation. The rotation mechanism 173A that performs the origin return operation can move to the correct origin position by the origin return operation, but performs an initial operation that rotates from the origin position to the rotation end in order to perform the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B.

  In FIG. 45 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by a dotted line in the drawing by a rotating mechanism 173A operated by an actuator 172A. 45 (2) and (3) in FIG. 45, the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. In FIG. 45 (4), the movable accessory 173 is moved from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, as shown by the solid line in the drawing. It is rotated. In order to open / close the opening / closing mechanism 173B, it is necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end. Therefore, the rotation mechanism 173A rotates to the rotation end even when the origin is returned. 45 (5) and (6) in FIG. 45, the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. In FIG. 45 (7), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the initial operation C is completed. The description of the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the home position return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B perform the home position return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A and the origin sensor 171B for detecting the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B are in the OFF state before the initial operation is performed, the rotation mechanism 173A performs the origin return operation. Need to do. Therefore, in the initial operation D, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are returned to the origin, and the initial operations of the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are omitted.

  46 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by the dotted line in the drawing by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. In FIG. 46 (2), the movable accessory 173 performs a return to origin operation as shown by the dotted line in the drawing by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. 46 (3) and (4) shown in FIG. 46, the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. The description of the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the combination of the initial operations of the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the movable accessory using the actuator will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of coupling of the initial operations of the movable combination using the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the actuator. In the combination of the initial operations, a plurality of initial operations of the movable accessory are combined to suppress a time required for confirming the plurality of operations, thereby executing a suitable initial operation. In the present embodiment, the case where the slide operation of the slide mechanism 173C in the long initial operation described in FIGS. 40 and 41 is combined to suppress the time of the initial operation related to the slide mechanism 173C will be exemplified.

  In FIG. 47 (1), the movable accessory 173 is moved from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A as shown by the solid line in the figure. It is rotated. 47 (2) and (3) shown in FIG. 47, the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B.

  47 (4), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the slide end in the right direction in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. 47 (5), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the right direction in the drawing to the slide end in the left direction in the drawing by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. 47 (6), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the left direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. 47 (4) to (5) is a combination of the sliding operations shown in FIGS. 40 (2) and (3) and the sliding operations shown in FIGS. 41 (2) and (3). By combining the slide operation, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced as compared with the case where the right slide operation and the left slide operation are performed in separate initial operations.

  47 (7), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A. 47 (8) and (9) shown in FIG. 47, the movable accessory 175 performs the short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D and ends the initial operation. The description of the coupling of the initial operations of the movable combination using the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the actuator using FIG. 47 is finished.

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described, but the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  (1-1) For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 or the like) capable of playing a game, and a plurality of movable accessories (for example, 36, the movement control of which is controlled by the effect control CPU 120, such as the rotation mechanism 173A of the movable accessory 173, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C, and the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175). A return operation (for example, an operation for returning to the origin position where the operation is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 (origin return operation) shown by a dotted line in FIGS. 43 to 46) is performed. 43 or 44, the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the origin return operation, and the rotation mechanism 173A performs the origin return operation in FIG 45 or FIG 46. Alternatively, in the mode according to the mode in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the origin return operation in FIG. 45 and the mode in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation in FIG. 44 or FIG. 46 (for example, in FIGS. When the movement mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation, the operation mechanism that has performed the origin return operation does not perform an initial operation (short initial operation), or the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B is the origin. Initial operation of movable accessory (for example, short initial operation shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, for example, in an aspect in which an initial operation (short initial operation) is performed for an operation mechanism that has not performed an origin return operation when the return operation is not performed) (For example, any one of the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 46). Including a mode in which no initial operation is performed with respect to the production mechanism), a single operation effect (for example, a first single character effect to a fourth single character effect) for operating the movable character alone, and a plurality of movable characters. Interlocking operation effect (for example, interlocking role effect. For example, “interlocking” means that a plurality of movable actors appear to have some relation in appearance. “Direction” is an effect in which a plurality of movable actors are operated so as to have some relations. “Interlocked operation effect” refers to a plurality of movable actors by operating a plurality of movable actors integrally. It may be an effect that causes the player to recognize that the object has some relationship (for example, an effect that combines a plurality of movable objects), or each movable object is operated independently, Taimin to work Effect that causes the player to recognize that the plurality of movable accessories have some kind of relationship by controlling the movement or other effect members (for example, that the plurality of movable accessories are operating integrally in the image display device 5). It may be an effect to display the image shown. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the present embodiment, the single operation effect and the interlocking operation effect are executed during the change, but may be executed at a timing that is not changing. For example, it may be possible to execute a single operation effect and a linked operation effect as a big hit effect or a small hit effect. Specifically, it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player after performing an effect that makes it difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit with a large number of rounds or a big hit that shifts to a probabilistic state). A single action effect and an interlocked action effect as an effect that informs that during a big hit (so-called promotion effect), or an effect that suggests that a stored memory that is a big hit is stored (so-called hold continuous effect) It is good also as performing. Further, for example, it is possible to execute the single operation effect and the interlocking operation effect while performing the demonstration display (demonstration screen display). Further, only one of the single operation effect and the interlocking operation effect can be executed while changing, and the other can be executed while not changing. In addition, it is possible to execute a single operation effect and a linked operation effect as a notice effect for a change that has not yet been started (so-called prefetch notice).

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the effect which interlocks all the movable actors was performed as an interlocking operation effect, it is not restricted to this. For example, in the case of a gaming machine provided with three or more movable accessories, it is possible to execute an effect of operating a part of the movable actors as a linked operation effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the movable combination operated in the single operation effect and the part of the movable combination operated in the interlocking operation effect are common, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a completely different movable accessory may be operated for a single operation effect and a linked operation effect.

  (1-2) For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 or the like) capable of playing a game, and a movable accessory (for example, FIG. The rotation mechanism 173A of the movable accessory 173, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C, and the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175, etc. whose operations are controlled by the effect control CPU 120 shown in 36 etc. are returned to the origin position. A return operation (for example, an operation of returning to the origin position where the operation is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 (origin return operation), etc., indicated by a dotted line in FIGS. 43 to 46) is performed. 43 or 44, the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the origin return operation, and the rotation mechanism 173A performs the origin return operation in FIG 45 or FIG 46. 45 in an aspect in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform an origin return operation and an aspect in accordance with an aspect in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs an origin return operation in FIG. 44 or FIG. 46 (for example, in FIGS. When the 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin returning operation, the operation mechanism that has performed the origin returning operation does not perform the initial operation (short initial operation) or the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin returning operation. The initial action (for example, the short initial action shown in FIGS. 43 to 46) of the movable accessory is performed (for example, in the mode of performing the initial action (short initial action) for the operation mechanism that did not perform the origin return action). (For example, any of the rotating mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 46) Including a mode in which the initial action is not performed), a first action effect that moves the movable accessory in the center direction of the effect region (for example, the fourth independent combination in which the movable accessory 175 is operated in the center direction of the image display device 5). “Production area” is an area where some effect is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the image display device 5, the game board 2, the entire pachinko gaming machine 1, a game area where a game ball is driven, or An opening or the like provided in the game board 2 in order to arrange effect members such as the image display device 5 may be used as an “effect region”. Even if it is a gaming machine provided outside the frame, the image display device or the game board may be used as an “effect area”.) And the movable accessory is operated in a manner different from the first action effect. Second action effect (for example, For example, although the movable combination 175 is capable of executing a linked combination effect that is operated in a mode different from the fourth single combination effect), a gaming machine that can execute a suitable initial operation is exemplified. The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  In addition, as the “second motion effect”, an effect (linked motion effect) in which the operation distance (movement distance) of the first action effect (fourth single actor effect) and the movable accessory 175 is different is executed. This is not a limitation. For example, an effect in which the moving direction of the movable accessory 175 is different from the first operation effect, or an effect of rotating the movable accessory 175 may be executed as the second action effect.

  In the present embodiment, the first action effect and the second action effect are executed during the change, but may be executed at a timing that is not changing. For example, the first action effect and the second action effect may be executable as a big hit effect or a small hit effect. Specifically, it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player after performing an effect that makes it difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit with a large number of rounds or a big hit that shifts to a probabilistic state). The first action effect and the second action are effects (so-called promotion effects) for notifying that during a big hit, and effects (so-called continuous rendition effects) that suggest during a big hit that a stored memory that is a big hit is stored. An operation effect may be performed. In addition, for example, the first operation effect and the second operation effect may be executable while performing demonstration display (demonstration screen display). Further, only one of the first action effect and the second action effect may be executed during the fluctuation, and the other may be executed during the non-fluctuation. Further, the first action effect and the second action effect may be executable as a notice effect for a change that has not yet started (so-called prefetch notice).

  For example, in this embodiment, when performing an origin return operation for returning the movable accessory to the origin position, the initial operation is not performed (the following pattern A), and when the origin return operation is not performed, the short initial is performed ( Although the following pattern F) is illustrated, the patterns A to H as described below may be combined with the origin return operation mode and the initial operation mode of the movable accessory in the initial operation. Pattern A Home return operation + No initial operation Pattern B Home return operation + Short initial operation Pattern C Home return operation + Short initial operation + Long initial operation Pattern D Home return operation + Long initial operation Pattern E No home return operation + No initial operation Pattern F No home return operation + short initial operation Pattern G No home return operation + short initial operation + long initial operation Pattern H No home return operation + long initial operation

  In addition, as shown in the pattern A and the pattern E, the operation mode of the initial operation may include one that does not perform the initial operation. Moreover, in the above pattern, the origin return operation, the short initial operation, and the long initial operation have been described separately, but for example, the origin return operation includes a short initial operation. Also good. That is, the operation mode of the long initial operation may be executed according to the operation mode of the origin return operation including the short initial.

  The patterns A to H may be used in the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. For example, different patterns may be used for the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. Further, the same pattern may be used in the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. In addition, the pattern used in the initial operation at power-on and the initial operation during the demonstration may be a predetermined pattern, or one pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns according to a predetermined condition. It may be a thing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the short initial operation performs one operation is illustrated, but the short initial operation may be performed by selecting an operation mode from a plurality of operation modes. For example, a predetermined operation mode may be selected from a plurality of operation modes according to the mode of the origin return operation. The predetermined operation mode of the short initial is different in the production mode such as the moving distance, the moving speed, the number of times of movement, the operating time, the sound effect output from the speaker 8 and the lighting pattern of the lamp 9. There may be. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the case where the long initial operation performs one operation is illustrated, but the long initial operation may be performed by selecting an operation mode from a plurality of operation modes. For example, a predetermined operation mode may be selected from a plurality of operation modes according to the mode of the origin return operation or the mode of the short initial operation. Furthermore, in the initial operation pattern that is executed by combining the short initial operation and the long initial operation, the short initial operation and the long initial operation are performed by selecting a combination of operation modes from a plurality of operation mode combinations. Also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the initial operation is performed at the time of power-on and during the demonstration is illustrated, but the initial operation may be performed at other timing. For example, the initial operation may be a timing when the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition. The timing that satisfies the predetermined condition is, for example, a timing that is not limited to during the demonstration, and may be when a predetermined time has elapsed after the suspension of fluctuation. The predetermined time after the fluctuation stop may be, for example, one hour after the fluctuation stop. Further, the predetermined time after the fluctuation stop may be immediately after the fluctuation stop. Moreover, the timing which satisfy | fills a predetermined condition may be after a fluctuation | variation start. The timing that satisfies the predetermined condition may be, for example, a timing immediately after the start of fluctuation. Moreover, it may be just before the super reach production etc. is performed after the fluctuation start. The initial operation may be executed at an arbitrary timing when a player or hall clerk performs a predetermined operation.

  (2) Also, in the gaming machine of (1) above, when the movable accessory is at the origin position before the return operation (for example, the origin sensor 171A shown in FIG. 36 or the origin sensor 171B shown in FIG. 37 is on) (For example, the rotating mechanism 173A shown in FIG. 43 is operated in (3) and (6), and the opening / closing mechanism 173B is operated in (4) and ( 5) The initial operation may be performed in the operation of 5), and according to such a gaming machine, even if the movable accessory is at the origin position from the beginning, the operation can be confirmed in the initial operation. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  (3) Also, in the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the movable accessory that has performed the return operation does not perform the initial operation (for example, the operation in which the operation (2) shown in FIG. 46 is performed). And the opening / closing mechanism 173B that performed the operation of (1) may not be initially operated), and according to such a gaming machine, by suppressing the time required for the operation check, Although a case where a suitable initial operation can be performed has been illustrated, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  (4) Further, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the movable accessory that has performed the return operation (for example, the rotating mechanism 173A that performed the return operation (1) in FIG. 45). Etc.) (for example, the operations of (4) and (7) of the rotating mechanism 173A in FIG. 45) and other initial operations (for example, of the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 5) and the operation of (6), etc.), and according to such a gaming machine, a case where a suitable initial operation according to the situation can be executed is illustrated. Such a gaming machine is not limited to this.

  (5) Also, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), after performing the initial operation, the movable accessory confirmation operation corresponding to the rendering operation (for example, shown in FIGS. 39 to 42, The rotary mechanism 173A, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C of the movable accessory 173, and the long initial operation of the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175 may be performed. According to such a gaming machine, In the game according to the present invention, the case where the confirmation operation can be suitably confirmed by confirming the operation of the movable accessory by the short initial operation before confirming the production operation by the long initial operation. The machine is not limited to this.

  (6) Further, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), when the power is turned on (for example, the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151 executed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 27) The return operation is performed at a timing other than (when the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of step S1014 executed by the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 29 is performed). However, according to such a gaming machine, there has been an example in which the chance of confirming the malfunction of the movable accessory is increased and the malfunction of the production operation can be suppressed. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited to.

  (7) Also, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), an initial operation in which a plurality of operations are mixed (for example, a slide mechanism 173C controlled by the CPU 120 for effect control is shown in FIG. (2) and (3) leftward sliding operation and rightward sliding operation shown in FIG. 47 may be mixed, and (4) to (6) horizontal sliding operation shown in FIG. 47) may be performed. According to such a gaming machine, the case where a suitable initial operation can be executed by suppressing the time required for confirming a plurality of operations of the movable accessory has been exemplified, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is limited to this. Not.

  (8) In addition, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), when the gaming machine is activated, a checking operation for checking the operation of the movable accessory (for example, a long initial operation) Also, a break-in operation (for example, a short initial operation) may be executed. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 1 below.

  In the gaming machine according to the first modification, an effect unit 300 is provided in place of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 described above. The production unit 300 may be provided in combination with one or both of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 to 51, the effect unit 300 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and is a base portion 301 fixed at a predetermined location. A movable portion 302 provided to be rotatable with respect to the base portion 301, a tilting position where the movable portion 302 is tilted sideways (see FIG. 51A), and an upright position (see FIG. 51 (FIG. 51)). B)), and a first effect motor 303 that rotates between them.

  A bearing hole 310 is formed through the base portion 301, and a guide groove 311 having an arc shape centering on the bearing hole 310 is formed around the bearing hole 310. At the lower right position of the bearing hole 310 on the back surface of the base portion 301, a first effect motor 303 that rotates the movable portion 302 is fixed on the back surface, and the drive projecting forward through the base portion 301. A turntable 312 is fixed to the tip of a shaft (not shown).

  A shaft member 313 that faces in the front-rear direction protrudes from a predetermined peripheral edge of the turntable 312, and the lower end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported by the shaft member 313. Further, a detection piece 315 is provided on the opposite side of the periphery of the turntable 312 to the shaft member 313, and the detection piece 315 is detected by a position detection sensor 316 provided below the turntable 312. The production control CPU 120 can specify that the movable portion 302 is located at the tilt position.

  The movable portion 302 includes a rotating member 320, a movable member 321 provided on the front side of the rotating member 320 so as to be slidable with respect to the rotating member 320, and a movable member on the back side of the rotating member 320. 321 and a rack gear 322 that moves integrally. The movable member 321 can be reciprocated between a first position on the rotating shaft 325 side with respect to the rotating member 320 and a second position farther from the rotating shaft 325 than the first position.

  In Modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable effect of moving the movable member 321 between the first position and the second position when the movable part 302 is in the standing position. Yes. The movable member 321 is at least partially retracted below the display screen of the image display device 5 when in the first position, and at least partially overlaps the front side of the display screen of the image display device 5 at the second position. It is supposed to be.

  The rotating member 320 is formed of a substantially plate-like member extending in the left-right direction, and is provided on the right side of the front surface so as to project from the rotating shaft 325 and the left side of the rotating shaft 325 by being inserted into the bearing hole 310 from the rear side. The first guide shaft 326 inserted into the guide groove 311 from the rear side, and the second guide shaft 327 protruding from the upper right side of the rotation shaft 325 and inserted from the rear side into the guide groove 311 are protruded. Yes.

  The upper end of the link member 314 is pivotally supported at the tip of the second guide shaft 327 that is inserted through the guide groove 311 and protrudes to the front side of the base portion 301. That is, the turntable 312 and the rotation member 320 are connected via the link member 314. A coil spring 328 is provided on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft 325 to urge the rotation member 320 toward the standing position at all times.

  On the left side of the first guide shaft 326, a linear slide groove 329 that guides the movable member 321 in the left-right direction extends in the left-right direction. A second effect motor 330 for sliding the movable member 321 is fixed above the slide groove 329 on the front surface of the rotating member 320, and the drive shaft protrudes rearward through the base portion 301. A pinion gear 331 for operating the rack gear 322 is fixed to the tip of 330a. In the first modification, a stepping motor is applied as the second effect motor 330.

  A hook 332 that is engaged with the left end of the tension spring 323 for biasing the rack gear 322 is provided on the rear surface on the left side of the rotating member 320 so as to protrude rearward. In addition, a position detection sensor 333 that detects a detection piece 334 formed at the right end of the rack gear 322 is provided on the right rear surface, and the detection piece 334 is detected by the position detection sensor 333, thereby performing the effect control. The CPU 120 can specify that the movable member 321 is located at the first position.

  The movable member 321 has a disk-shaped light emitting part 321A and an attachment part 321B extending to the right side from the light emitting part 321A. The light emitting unit 321A is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) (not shown) inside, and can emit light forward. Further, two bosses 334a and 334b project from the rear surface of the mounting portion 321B. The bosses 334a and 334b are inserted into the slide groove 329 and are rack geared by screws N1 screwed from the rear surface side of the rack gear 322. By fixing 322, the movable member 321 disposed on the front side of the rotating member 320 and the rack gear 322 disposed on the rear side of the rotating member 320 are integrated.

  The integrated movable member 321 and rack gear 322 are guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the rotating member 320 by inserting two bosses 334 a and 334 b into the slide groove 329. Further, on the right side of the rack gear 322, a hook 335 is protruded rearward so that the right end of the tension spring 323 is locked to the hook 332 of the rotating member 320. That is, one end of the tension spring 323 is locked to the hook 332 of the rotating member 320 and the other end is locked to the hook 335 of the rack gear 322, so that the movable member 321 is always directed toward the second position. Energize.

  In the effect unit 300 configured as described above, the movable portion 302 is located at the tilted position as shown in FIG. 51A in the initial driving state. Then, when the turntable 312 is rotated clockwise by the first effect motor 303 by the front view, the second guide shaft 327 is pulled downward by the link member 314, so that the front view about the rotation shaft 325 is obtained. It rotates about 90 degrees clockwise and rotates to the standing position shown in FIG. In addition, since the urging force of the coil spring 328 acts when rotating from the tilt position to the standing position, the load on the first effect motor 303 is reduced. Further, the first effect motor 303 is reversely driven to rotate from the standing position to the tilt position.

  In addition, the effect unit 300 is provided with a cable 361 that supplies power to the LED of the light emitting unit 321 </ b> A of the movable member 321.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 in Modification 1. Note that the processes of steps S51 and S52 to S56 in the production control main process of Modification 1 are the same processes as steps S71 to S76 in the production control main process shown in FIG.

  In the effect control main process in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable member break-in process for executing a break-in operation for moving the movable member 321 (S51A). The movable member break-in process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms the operation of a plurality of types of movement patterns of the movable member 321 in the effect such as the notice effect, or uses the position detection sensor 333 to detect the initial position of the movable member 321 (in the present embodiment, the first position). Position) is detected, or a movable member initialization process for moving the movable member 321 to the initial position is executed (S51B).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the movable member break-in process (S51A) in the effect control main process. Referring to FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first effect motor 303 to move the movable portion 302 to the standing position (S511).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable portion 302 (S512). When it is determined that an abnormality has been detected (YES in S512), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the abnormality of the movable unit 302 (S513). The notification is performed by display on the image display device 5 and sound output from a speaker.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation to stop the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the game store (S514). When it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable unit 302 has not been detected (NO in S512), and when it is determined that an operation for stopping the notification has been performed (YES in S514), the effect control CPU 120 is movable. The second effect motor 330 is controlled to move the member 321 to the first position (S515). Here, the movable member 321 may be reciprocated between the second position and the first position.

  Thus, since the movable member is moved by the second effect motor 330 having a stronger force than the tension spring 323, the movable member 321 can be moved more reliably. Accordingly, the movement of the cable 361 and the movable member 321 can be accustomed by changing the cable 361 from the bent state to the extended state.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an abnormality has been detected in the movement of the movable member 321 (S516). When it is determined that an abnormality has been detected (YES in S516), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the abnormality of the movable member 321 (S517). The notification is performed by display on the image display device 5 and sound output from the speaker 8.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation for stopping the notification has been performed by a store clerk of the game store (S518). When it is determined that an abnormality in the movement of the movable member 321 is not detected (NO in S516), and when it is determined that an operation for stopping the notification is performed (YES in S518), the CPU 120 for effect control is executed. Return the process to be performed to the caller of this process.

  As described above, according to the first modification, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1, the slot machine) capable of playing a game, the standby position (for example, the first position) and the advance A movable accessory (for example, movable member 321) movable to a position (for example, the second position) is provided, and a confirmation operation (for example, deformation) for confirming the operation of the movable accessory when the gaming machine is activated. The operation in the movable member initialization process in Step S51B in Example 1) and the break-in operation for moving the movable accessory (for example, Step S51A, the break-in operation in the movable member break-in process in FIG. 53 (also referred to as a short initial operation)). It is good to do.

  According to such a configuration, a confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable accessory and a running-in operation for moving the movable accessory are executed. For this reason, since the movement of the movable accessory is not familiar, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation of the movable accessory. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the movable accessory from operating well.

  In the first modification, the description has been made using a single movable combination. However, when a plurality of movable combinations are provided as in the above-described embodiment, the confirmation operation is performed for all the movable combinations. The initial operation may be performed when the gaming machine is activated, or the confirmation operation and the initial operation may be performed only when some of the movable accessories are activated.

  Further, according to the first modification, when an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable accessory during the break-in operation, error processing (for example, notification of abnormality) is executed (for example, steps S513 and S517 in FIG. 53). It is good.

  According to such a configuration, if an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable accessory during the break-in operation, error processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute processing corresponding to a state in which the movable accessory does not operate normally.

  Further, according to the first modification, a break-in operation may be executed before the confirmation operation (see, for example, FIG. 52).

  According to such a configuration, the break-in operation is executed before the confirmation operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movable accessory from operating well in the confirmation operation.

  Further, according to the first modification, when an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable accessory during the break-in operation, the execution of the confirmation operation is prohibited (for example, the notification stop operation is performed in steps S514 and S518 in FIG. 53). Up to this point, the movable member initialization process in step S51B of FIG. 52 may not be executed).

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected in the movement of the movable accessory during the break-in operation, the execution of the confirmation operation is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the confirmation operation from being performed while the movable accessory does not operate normally.

  Further, according to the first modification, the movable accessory may be moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation.

  According to such a configuration, the movable accessory is moved to the advanced position by different power sources during the game and during the running-in operation. As a result, the break-in operation can be performed with a suitable power source.

  Further, according to the first modification, the movable accessory is acclimated to an elastic body (for example, a tension spring 323, which may be another elastic body such as a spiral spring, a leaf spring, or rubber) during the game. During execution, a motor having a stronger force than the elastic body (for example, the second performance motor 330) may be moved to the advanced position as a power source.

  According to such a configuration, a motor having a stronger force than the elastic body is used as a power source for the movable accessory in the break-in operation. As a result, it is possible to move the movable accessory more reliably to the advanced position in the break-in operation.

  According to the first modification, the movable accessory includes an electric cable (for example, the cable 361) that bends and stretches as the movable accessory moves, and the break-in operation causes the electric cable to move by moving the movable accessory. It may be an operation of bending and accustoming.

  According to such a configuration, the confirmation operation for confirming the operation of the movable accessory and the running-in operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable accessory are executed. For this reason, since the movement of the electric cable is not used, it is possible to suppress the influence of the operation of the movable accessory. As a result, it can suppress that a movable accessory does not operate | move favorably.

  According to the first modification, the electric cable may be provided in the vicinity of an object that generates heat (for example, the LCD of the image display device 5, the first effect motor 303, the second effect motor 330). .

  According to such a configuration, the electrical cable becomes flexible due to heat. As a result, the movable accessory can be moved more reliably.

  According to the first modification, the running-in operation is an operation of bending and stretching the electric cable by moving the movable accessory. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the movable accessory is configured to move along the rail, the movable accessory is configured to move with a ball screw or a linear guide, and the movable accessory. However, when the bearing is configured to rotate or rotate with a bearing such as a sliding bearing, a metal bearing, or a resin bearing, it may be an operation that moves and habituates so that a lubricant such as oil or grease becomes familiar. Further, when the movable accessory has a sliding part such as a rotation or a linear motion, it may be an operation of moving and fixing the sliding part to make it smooth.

  Further, according to the first modification, the break-in operation is performed at the time of startup. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation may be periodically performed during a demonstration in which a game after the start is not performed. Even if it does in this way, it can suppress that a movable accessory does not operate | move favorably during a game.

  According to the first modification, the cable 361 supplies power to the LED. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and power or a control signal is supplied to other electrical components (for example, an actuator such as a motor or a solenoid that moves a movable accessory or a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) that displays an image). It may be a thing.

  In the first modification, the cable 361 may be a flexible flat cable, may be a flat cable in which a plurality of coated wires are aligned and fused, or may be a single wire or a stranded wire. It may be a twisted pair wire.

  Further, according to the first modification, the break-in operation and the confirmation operation are performed separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the break-in operation and the confirmation operation may be executed as a series of operations.

  Further, according to the first modification, the initial position of the movable accessory is detected in the confirmation operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial position of the movable accessory may be detected in the break-in operation. In addition to the break-in operation and the confirmation operation, the initial position of the movable accessory may be detected.

  (9) Further, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (8), the first effect and the second effect for operating the movable accessory can be executed, and the second effect within a predetermined period. When the execution ratio is high, execution of the second effect may be restricted, and the first effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the execution rate is low. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 2 below.

  In the second modification, as the notice effect during the change, the movable object notice effect (movable object notice A, movable object notice B, movable object notice C) for operating the movable accessory 175 and the movable object 175 that is not movable are not movable. Body notice effects (cut-in notice, group notice) are provided. The movable body notice A is a notice effect that causes the movable accessory 175 to swing at a low speed, and the movable body notice B is a notice effect that causes the movable accessory 175 to swing at a higher speed than the movable object notice A. The movable body notice C is a notice effect that lowers the movable accessory 175 from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. The cut-in notice is a notice effect that inserts (cuts in) a predetermined display and displays it on the image display device 5. The group notice is a notice effect for displaying a group of characters on the image display device 5. The movable body notice C is an effect performed over 3 seconds when the super reach enters, while the notice effects other than the movable body notice C are executed for 1 second after the start of the change. .

  In addition, the movable body notice C is always performed at the time of entering the super reach, and the notice effect other than the movable body notice C is configured to be executed regardless of whether or not it is a super reach fluctuation. Up to two movable body notice effects can be executed.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a notice effect setting process (step S8003) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs an operation number measurement process for measuring the number of movements of the movable accessory 175 in the latest 10 changes (step S3901). Specifically, the operation count measurement process is performed using the operation count storage area formed in the RAM 122.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation count storage area in the second modification. As shown in FIG. 55, the operation count storage area is composed of 10 storage areas (storage area 1 to storage area 10), and each storage area can store the operation count of the movable accessory 175 for each variation. Specifically, the storage area 1 stores the number of operations of the movable accessory 175 in the previous change, and the storage area 2 stores the number of operations of the movable accessory 175 in the previous change. Yes. Similarly, in the storage area 3 to the storage area 10, the number of operations of the movable accessory 175 in the variation 3 to 10 times before is stored. Note that, in the second modification, since the movable body notice effect can be executed up to two times in one change, the value of the number of operations in each storage area is any one of “0” to “2”. .

  The number of operations stored in each storage area is updated at the start of fluctuation. Specifically, at the start of fluctuation, the number of operations in the storage area is shifted (the number of operations in the storage area 10 is cleared (“0” is stored), and the number of operations in the storage areas 1 to 9 is The number of movements of the storage area 2 to the storage area 10 is stored again (see step S3905 described later), and the number of executions of the movable body notice effect in the new change is stored as the number of movements of the storage area 1 (step S3908 described later). Thus, the update is completed.

  In step S3901, specifically, the total number of operations in the operation count storage area is measured. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 55, “1” is stored as the number of operations in the storage area 1, the storage area 3, and the storage area 9, and “2” is stored in the storage area 7. The result of processing is “5”. In that case, the number of movements of the movable accessory 175 in the last 10 fluctuations is five.

  After step S3901, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the processing result of the operation count measurement process is “5” or more (whether or not the operation count of the movable accessory 175 in the last 10 fluctuations is 5 or more). (Step S3902), if it is less than “5”, the normal notice effect execution lottery table is selected (step S3903). If it is “5” or more, the limited time notice effect execution lottery table is selected (step S3904). The normal notice effect execution lottery table and the restriction notice effect execution lottery table are the notice effect execution lottery tables used in the notice effect execution lottery process (see step S3906) for determining whether or not the notice effect is executed. Each notice effect execution lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect execution lottery table in the second modification. In the notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 56, determination values corresponding to the presence / absence of the notice effect and the type of the notice effect when executed are assigned according to the variation pattern. In the example shown in FIG. In order to simplify the explanation, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for the notice effect execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  Note that the types of the notice effects set in the notice effect setting process include the movable object notice effects (movable object notice A and movable object notice B) for operating the movable accessory 175 and the non-movable that does not move the movable accessory 175. There are body notice effects (cut-in notice, group notice).

  For example, in the normal notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 56A, when a variation pattern indicating non-reach deviation is received, no notice effect is executed at a rate of 90% (non-execution). It is determined that the movable body notice A is executed at a rate of% and the cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 3%.

  In addition, when a variation pattern indicating a deviation from normal reach is received, the fact that no notice effect is performed at a rate of 70% (non-execution) is that the movable object notice A is executed at a rate of 12%. It is determined that the movable body notice B is executed at a rate, the cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 7%, and the group notice is executed at a rate of 3%.

  In addition, when a variation pattern indicating super-reach deviation is received, the fact that no notice effect is executed at a rate of 40% (non-execution) means that the movable object notice A is executed at a rate of 20%. It is determined that the movable body notice B is executed at the rate of 10%, the cut-in notice is executed at the rate of 10%, and the group notice is executed at the rate of 10%.

  In addition, when a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal reach jackpot is received, it is 10% that no notice effect is executed at a rate of 60% (non-execution), but the movable object notice A is executed at a rate of 15%. It is determined that the movable body notice B is executed at a rate, the cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 10%, and the group notice is executed at a rate of 5%.

  In addition, when a variation pattern indicating a super reach jackpot is received, the fact that no notice effect is executed at a rate of 20% (non-execution) means that the movable object notice A is executed at a rate of 20%. It is determined that the movable body notice B is executed at the rate of 10%, the cut-in notice is executed at the rate of 10%, and the group notice is executed at the rate of 20%.

  As described above, when the execution ratios of the movable body notice A and the movable body notice B are compared, the movable body notice A is more likely to occur when the reach (non-reach, normal reach) is low in reliability for the big hit. In the case of a reach with a high degree of reliability (super reach), the movable body notice B is more likely to occur. That is, the reliability for the big hit is such that the movable body notice B is higher than the movable body notice A.

  Also, comparing the execution ratio of cut-in notice and group notice, cut-in notice is more likely to occur when reach is low (non-reach, normal reach) with high reliability for jackpots, and reach with high reliability for jackpots. In the case of (Super Reach), the group notice is more likely to occur. That is, the reliability for the big hit is higher in the group notice than in the cut-in notice.

  Also, for example, in the limited-time notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 56B, when a variation pattern indicating non-reach deviation is received, no notice effect is executed at a rate of 90% (non-execution). However, it is determined that the cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 10%.

  In addition, when a variation pattern indicating a deviation from normal reach is received, no notice effect is executed at a rate of 70% (non-execution), but a cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 25%. It is decided to execute the group notice in each.

  In addition, when a variation pattern indicating a super-reach deviation is received, the fact that no notice effect is executed at a rate of 40% (non-execution) is that a cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 40%. It is decided to execute the group notice in proportion.

  In addition, when a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal reach jackpot is received, no notice effect is executed at a rate of 60% (non-execution), but a cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the group notice in each.

  In addition, when a fluctuation pattern indicating a super reach jackpot is received, the fact that no notice effect is executed at a rate of 20% (non-execution) is that a cut-in notice is executed at a rate of 35%. It is decided to execute the group notice in proportion.

  Thus, in the notice effect execution lottery process using the restriction notice effect execution lottery table, the movable object notice A and the movable object notice B are not selected. In other words, when the number of movements of the movable accessory 175 during the last 10 fluctuations is 5 or more, the execution of the movable body advance notice A and the movable body advance notice B is restricted.

  Further, in this way, in the notice effect execution lottery process using the limited notice effect execution lottery table, the non-movable object notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the normal notice effect execution lottery table is used. Will be. That is, when the number of movements of the movable accessory 175 during the last 10 fluctuations is 5 or more, the execution ratio of the non-movable body notice effect is increased.

  In addition, in this way, when a variation pattern indicating non-reach deviation is received, when the limited-time notice effect execution lottery table is used, the movable body notice is compared to when the normal notice effect execution lottery table is used. On the other hand, the limit degree of the movable body notice A is larger than B (specifically, the execution ratio of the movable body notice A has decreased by 7 points, while the execution ratio of the movable body notice B has not changed). The cut-in notice execution rate is higher than the group notice execution rate.

  In addition, when a variation pattern indicating a loss of normal reach is received, when the limited notice advancement effect execution lottery table is used, the movable object notice B is more movable than when the normal notice effect execution lottery table is used. On the other hand, the restriction degree of the notice A is large (specifically, while the execution ratio of the movable body notice A is reduced by 12 points, the execution ratio of the movable object notice B is reduced by 8 points), on the other hand, the group notice The execution rate of the cut-in notice is higher than the execution rate of.

  In addition, when a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal reach jackpot is received, when the limited-time notice effect execution lottery table is used, the movable object notice B is more movable than when the normal notice effect execution lottery table is used. On the other hand, the restriction degree of the notice A is large (specifically, while the execution ratio of the movable body notice A is reduced by 15 points, the execution ratio of the movable object notice B is reduced by 10 points), on the other hand, the group notice The execution rate of the cut-in notice is higher than the execution rate of.

  In addition, when a variation pattern indicating a super reach jackpot is received, when the limited-time notice effect execution lottery table is used, the movable object notice than the movable object notice A is used more than when the normal notice effect execution lottery table is used. On the other hand, the degree of restriction of B is large (specifically, while the execution ratio of the movable body notice A is reduced by 20 points, the execution ratio of the movable body notice B is reduced by 30 points), on the other hand, the cut-in notice The execution rate of the group notice is higher than the execution rate of.

  As described above, in the second modification, the execution ratios of the plurality of non-movable body notice effects differ depending on the degree of restriction of the movable object notice effect (which movable object notice effect is restricted). Thereby, the production according to the situation can be executed. Specifically, when the movable body notice A is restricted, it is easy to execute the cut-in notice (that is, when the movable body notice effect with low reliability with respect to the big hit is restricted, the non-movable body with low reliability with respect to the big hit. On the other hand, when the movable body notice B is restricted, the group notice is easily executed (that is, when the movable body notice effect with high reliability for the big hit is restricted, the reliability for the big hit is increased). The execution ratio of the highly non-movable object notice effect is increased). Therefore, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the execution frequency of the notice effect based on the restriction on the execution of the movable object notice effect by executing the non-movable object notice effect having the same reliability as the restricted movable object notice effect. A decrease can be prevented.

  In the second modification, the presence / absence of execution of each notice effect is determined in a lump, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a movable body notice effect (a lottery that allows only one of movable object notice A and movable object notice B to be executed) and whether or not to execute a non-movable object notice effect are determined. It is good also as each performing the lottery (lottery which can perform only any one among a cut-in notice and a group notice) to perform. Further, whether or not the movable body notice A is executed, whether or not the movable body notice B is executed, whether or not the cut-in notice is executed, and whether or not the group notice is executed may be determined by independent lottery. . In addition, when it is determined to execute a plurality of notice effects, they may be executed simultaneously or may be executed at different timings.

  In the modified example 2, in the notice effect execution lottery process using the restriction notice effect execution lottery table, the execution ratio of the movable object notice A and the movable object notice B is set to 0%. It is good also as reducing only the execution ratio of production. For example, the execution ratio of the movable body notice A may be 0%, and the execution ratio of the movable body notice B may be the same ratio as the notice effect execution lottery process using the normal notice effect execution lottery table. In addition, the execution ratio of the movable body notice effect whose execution is limited is not limited to 0%, and may be any lower than the execution ratio at the time of non-limitation.

  The specific execution ratio is not limited to that shown in FIG. For example, conversely to what is shown in FIG. 56, when the execution of the movable body notice A is restricted, the execution rate of the group notice is increased, and when the execution of the movable body notice B is restricted, the cut-in is performed. It is good also as raising the execution rate of a notice.

  After steps S3903 and S3904, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the stored contents of the operation count storage area (step S3905). Specifically, the number of operations in the storage area 10 is cleared (“0” is stored), and the number of operations stored in the storage area 9 is shifted to the storage area 10 and stored in the storage area 8. The number of operations is shifted to the storage area 9, the number of operations stored in the storage area 7 is shifted to the storage area 8, and the number of operations stored in the storage area 6 is shifted to the storage area 7. The stored operation count is shifted to the storage area 6, the operation count stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 5, the operation count stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 4, The number of operations stored in the storage area 2 is shifted to the storage area 3, the number of operations stored in the storage area 1 is shifted to the storage area 2, and 0 is stored in the storage area 1. Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect execution lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect (step S3906). Specifically, the notice effect execution lottery process is performed using the notice effect execution lottery table selected in steps S3903 and S3904.

  After step S3906, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the movable body advance notice A or the movable body advance notice B (step S3907). If it is decided not to execute the step, step S3910 is executed. Migrate to If it is decided to execute, the movable body notice effect (movable body notice A or movable body notice B) to be executed is set (step S3908), and 1 is added to the number of operations in the storage area 1 (step S3908). S3909). At this time, since the number of operations in the storage area 1 is 0, 1 is added and “1” is stored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the starting change is a super reach change (step S3910). If the start change is not a super reach change, the process ends. If it is a super reach fluctuation, 1 is added to the value of the storage area 1 (step S3911). Thereby, the number of operations of the movable accessory 175 corresponding to the movable body notice C is measured.

  In the second modification, the process of storing the number of movements in the movement number storage area (steps S3909 and S3911) is executed at the start of the change. However, the present invention is not limited to this and is actually movable in the movable body notice effect. It is good also as storing the value of the storage area 1 at the timing which operates the accessory 175, or the completion | finish timing of the fluctuation | variation which operated the movable accessory 175. FIG.

  In the second modification, the maximum number of executions of the movable body notice effect in one change is two, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream is selected, if the announcement effect can be repeatedly executed for each re-variation, the movable body announcement effect can be executed three times or more in one variation. Become. Specifically, when a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed three times is selected, before the first re-variation, after the first re-variation and before the second re-variation, and 2 If the movable body notice A is executed after the third re-variation and before the third re-change, and the movable body notice C is executed after the third re-variation, four times in one change. The movable body notice effect will be executed. Before the first re-variation, after the first re-variation and before the second re-variation, and after the second re-variation and before the third re-variation, it is not always necessary For example, before the first re-variation, after the first re-variation, and before the second re-variation, the movable body notice A is executed. The movable body notice B may be executed after the second re-variation and before the third re-variation. Further, when a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations is selected, each re-variation may be treated as “one variation”. For example, as described above, a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed three times is selected, before the first re-variation, after the first re-variation and before the second re-variation, and the second re-variation. If the movable body notice A is executed after the change and before the third re-variation, and the movable body notice C is executed after the third re-change, the change is made four times in the third change. It may be handled as if the movable body notice effect was performed.

  As described above, according to the second modification, the first effect (in this example, the non-movable body notice effect (cut-in notice, group notice)) and the second effect (the present example) that operates the movable accessory. Can be executed (movable body notice A, movable object notice B, movable object notice C)) (in this example, based on the process table selected in step S8004 in the CPU 120 for effect control). Steps S8006 and S172), when the execution ratio of the second effect within a predetermined period is high, the execution of the second effect is restricted and the first effect is executed at a higher rate than when the execution rate is low. (In this example, when the effect control CPU 120 has executed the movable body notice effect five times or more in the latest 10 fluctuations (Y in step S3902), the restriction shown in FIG. Using the notice effect execution lottery table (the notice effect execution lottery table in which the execution ratio of the movable object notice effect is lower and the execution ratio of the non-movable object notice effect is higher than the normal notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 56A). Step S3906 is executed). Thereby, the operation | movement of a movable accessory can be performed suitably, preventing the increase in cost. Specifically, since it is possible to prevent heat generation of the driving means (for example, the actuator 172D, the motor) by operating the movable accessory in a short time, there is no cost for measuring the temperature of the driving means. The malfunction of the operation due to heat generation can be prevented, and the operation of the movable accessory can be suitably executed.

  Further, as described above, according to the second modification, variable display can be executed, and the second effect can be executed while the variable display is being executed (in this example, the CPU 120 for effect control is variable) Steps S8006 and S172 can be executed during this period. Thereby, the operation | movement of the movable accessory in the variable display can be performed suitably, preventing the increase in cost.

  Further, in the second modification, a plurality of second effects in which the operation mode of the movable accessory is different (in this example, the movable body notice A for swinging the movable accessory 175 at a low speed, and the movable accessory 78 is swung at a high speed. The movable body advance notice B and the movable body advance notice C) for moving the movable accessory 175 to the front of the image display device 5 can be executed. Thereby, while being able to increase the variation of production, the operation | movement of a movable accessory can be performed suitably.

  Further, in the second modification, a plurality of first effects (in this example, cut-in notice and group notice) having different effect modes can be executed, and when the execution ratio of the second effect within a predetermined period is high, While restricting the execution of any one of the second effects, the first effect of any one of the plurality of first effects is varied depending on which execution of the second effect is restricted. (In this example, the effect control CPU 120 mainly limited the movable body notice A by executing step S3906 using the restriction notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 56B). If it is a non-reach out, normal reach out, or a fluctuation pattern indicating a normal reach big hit, it is easy to execute a cut-in notice and the movable object notice B is mainly limited (super Was easily) that executes the group notice when a change pattern indicating the reach jackpot). Thereby, the production according to the situation can be executed.

  In the second modification, game control means for controlling the progress of the game (in this example, the game control microcomputer 100), effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect (in this example, the effect control CPU 120), The game control means includes a specific second effect (movable body notice C in this example) among a plurality of second effects (movable body notice A, movable object notice B, and movable body notice C in this example). Whether or not to execute can be determined (in this example, the game control microcomputer 100 can determine whether or not the movable body notice C is to be executed by selecting a variation pattern), Whether or not to execute a special second effect (in this example, the movable body notice A and the movable body notice B) different from the second effect can be determined (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step S3906. Whether or not the movable body notice A and the movable body notice B can be executed can be determined), and the execution of the special second effect can be limited (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step S3906, thereby performing step S3904. To limit the execution of the movable body advance notice A and the movable body advance notice B). If the execution of the movable body notice effect corresponding to the variation pattern is also restricted, the effect becomes unnatural (for example, the player is not allowed to move at the timing at which the mover 175 should be operated, so May give you a sense of incompatibility). Therefore, as in the second modification, by not restricting the execution of the movable body notice effect corresponding to the variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming unnatural and to prevent the effect from being deteriorated.

  In the second modification, the non-movable body notice effect (cut-in notice, group notice) can be executed as the “first effect”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, any notice effect such as a step-up effect in which the effect develops step by step or a character effect in which a character appears may be used. Further, it may be an effect using an effect member other than the image display device 5, an effect of outputting sound from a speaker, or an effect using a light emitter such as a lamp or LED. In addition, the production is not limited to the production that does not move the movable accessory. It is good also as being executable as. Further, an effect using some of the movable combinations among the plurality of movable combinations may be referred to as a “first effect”, and an effect using other movable combinations may be referred to as a “second effect”.

  In the second modification, a plurality of types of non-movable body notice effects (cut-in notice, group notice) can be executed, but a single non-movable object notice effect may be executable. .

  In the second modification, a plurality of types of movable body notice effects (movable body notices A to C) can be executed as the “second effect”, but a single movable object notice is provided as the “second effect”. It is good also as being able to perform production. Moreover, the movable member operated in the movable body notice effect is not limited to a single member, and a movable object notice effect that operates a plurality of movable members may be executable. Moreover, it is good also as performing the display of the image by the image display apparatus 5, and the output of the sound by a speaker with operation | movement of a movable accessory.

  In the second modification, the movable body notice effect is a changing effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable object notice effect can be executed as a big hit effect or a small hit effect. Also good. Specifically, it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player after performing an effect that makes it difficult to recognize whether it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit with a large number of rounds or a big hit that shifts to a probabilistic state). An effect that operates a movable accessory as an effect that informs that during a big hit (so-called promotion effect), or an effect that suggests that a stored memory that will be a big hit is stored (so-called hold continuous effect) It is good also as performing. Even in that case, when the execution ratio of the effect for operating the movable accessory is high, the execution of the effect for operating the movable accessory may be restricted. In addition, the effect of moving the movable accessory during the big hit may be the restriction target.

  In addition, the “second effect” may be executable as a notice effect (so-called prefetch notice effect) for a change that has not yet started. For example, a pre-reading notice effect for operating a movable accessory over a plurality of variations (which may be intermittent or continuous) may be executable as the “second effect”. In that case, the pre-reading notice effect is determined depending on the number of the holding memory (for example, the first holding memory or the fourth holding memory) that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. Since the execution periods are different, the operation time of the movable accessory is different. Therefore, the mode of restriction may be made different depending on the number of reserved storages that are the target of the pre-reading notice effect. For example, the degree of restriction of the prefetching notice effect B whose fourth hold memory is the object of notice is higher than the degree of restriction of the prefetching notice effect A whose object of the first hold is the notice object (at the time of restriction, prefetching The execution ratio of the notice effect A may be half that of the normal time, while the execution ratio of the prefetch notice effect B may be 0% (execution prohibited). Even if the precondition for the prefetching notice effect is not satisfied, it is restricted when the prefetching notice effect is finished depending on the number of the reserved memory to be noticed. The condition may be met. For example, in a gaming machine in which the number of executions of the movable body warning effect during the last 10 fluctuations is 5 times, when the number of executions of the movable body warning effect during the last 10 fluctuations is 2, Performed a pre-reading notice effect (the one that executes the movable body notice effect once during each change. That is, the pre-reading notice effect that executes the four movable object notice effects) for the first reserved memory. In this case, it is conceivable that the limit condition is satisfied after the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is completed (the number of executions of the movable body notice effect during the last 10 changes is 5 or more). Therefore, even if the restriction condition of the prefetching notice effect is not satisfied, if it is considered that the restriction condition is satisfied by executing the prefetching notice effect, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted. It is good. For example, in the above-described example, the pre-reading notice effect (the movable object notice effect is executed once during each change for the fourth reserved memory). Execution of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed.) Is prohibited, while the pre-reading notice effect (the one that executes the movable body notice effect only twice) subject to the fourth hold memory as the notice object is executable. Also good. In addition, a pre-reading notice effect with the fourth reserved memory as a notice target (a movable object notice effect is executed once every change. That is, a pre-reading notice effect that executes four movable object notice effects) Is prohibited, while the pre-reading notice effect for the second reserved memory is subject to the notice (the movable object notice effect is executed once during each change. That is, the movable object notice effect is executed twice. The pre-reading notice effect.) May be executable. In addition, the execution rate such as the number of executions and the execution period of the movable body notice effect in each change in which the prefetch notice effect is executed may be monitored.

  In the second modification, the “predetermined period” in which the execution rate is monitored has been described using a period in which 10 fluctuations are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a period in which the number of times other than 10 (less than 9 or 11 or more) may be changed, or a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) may be set as the “predetermined period”. In addition, when a game state or a production state (for example, a production mode) is switched, the execution ratio may be monitored over a plurality of game states or production states, or the game state switching point and the production may be performed. The monitoring of the execution rate may be reset at at least one of the state switching points (for example, the data in the operation count storage area in Modification 2 may be cleared), and only the execution rate after switching may be monitored. . For example, if 5 minutes is a “predetermined period”, the control time of the big hit gaming state is within 5 minutes, and the performance state is different before and after the big hit, immediately after the big hit occurs, after the big hit occurs The execution ratio may be monitored, or only the execution ratio in the effect state after the big hit occurrence may be monitored.

  In addition, a period in which a single change is performed may be a “predetermined period”. For example, if one fluctuation period to be executed from now is set as a “predetermined period” and many movable accessory effects are executed in one fluctuation, the load on the driving means (actuator, motor) increases. Execution of the movable body notice effect may be limited by providing an upper limit of the number of executions of the movable object notice effect in one change. In addition, for example, the previously performed variation period is set to “predetermined period”, and the movable body advance notice for the change to be executed in the future is performed according to the execution ratio (the number of executions, the execution period, etc.) of the movable body advance notice effect in the previous change. It is good also as restricting execution of production. At that time, it may be limited by not executing any movable body notice effect, or may be restricted by providing an executable range (upper limit of the number of executions, upper limit of execution period, etc.) of the movable object notice effect. It may be.

  In the second modification, the “predetermined period” is always fixed (the most recent 10 fluctuations), but is not limited thereto. For example, in the low base state, the execution ratio of the movable body notice effect in the latest 10 changes may be monitored, and in the high base state, the execution ratio of the movable body notice effect in the latest 20 changes may be monitored. Further, the execution rate of the movable body warning effect in the latest 10 changes may be monitored in the low base state, and the execution rate of the movable body warning effect in the latest 5 minutes may be monitored in the high base state.

  In the second modification, the execution of the movable body warning effect is limited when the number of executions of the movable body warning effect is large within a predetermined period (10 fluctuations). However, the restriction condition is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the restriction condition may be that the execution time of the movable body notice effect within a predetermined period or the load of the driving means (actuator, motor) accompanying the execution of the movable object notice effect is higher than a predetermined value.

  For example, the execution of the movable body warning effect may be limited when the cumulative execution time of the movable body warning effect within a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined threshold. Specifically, when the movable body notice A and the movable body notice B are executed for 1.0 second, the movable body notice C is executed for 3.0 seconds, and the threshold is 10 seconds, the movable body When the notice A or the movable object notice B occurs 5 times and the movable object notice C occurs twice, the total execution time is 11 seconds, which is higher than the threshold value, so that the execution of the movable object notice effect is limited.

  In addition, for example, if the game machine has a predetermined load point corresponding to the load applied to the driving means (actuator, motor) for each type of the movable body announcement effect, the movable body announcement effect executed within a predetermined period. If the total value of the load points is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, the execution of the movable body notice effect may be restricted. Specifically, 10 points as the load point A of the movable body notice A, 20 points as the load point B of the movable body notice B, 40 points as the load point C of the movable body notice C, and 50 points as the threshold value, When each is determined, when the movable body notices A to C are generated once, the total value is 70 points, which is higher than the threshold value, so that the execution of the movable body notice effect is limited.

  Further, when monitoring the number of executions of the movable body notice effect within a predetermined period, it may be determined whether or not the execution of the movable object notice effect is restricted in consideration of the load of the driving unit. . For example, the execution of the movable body notice effect may be limited on the condition that the movable body notice effect has a larger load on the driving means and is executed a smaller number of times. Specifically, when a movable body notice D having a large load on the driving means and a movable body notice E having a small load on the driving means are provided, the movable body notice D is set to 2 within a predetermined period. On the other hand, the movable body notice E may be executed five times within a predetermined period as the restriction condition.

  Further, the monitoring target (the number of executions of the movable body notification effect, the execution time of the movable body notification effect, or the magnitude of the load of the driving means (actuator, motor) accompanying the execution of the movable body notification effect) within a predetermined period is one. It is good also as determining the presence or absence of the restriction | limiting of execution of a movable body notice effect based on several monitoring object. In that case, when any one of the plurality of monitoring targets satisfies the condition, the execution of the movable body notice effect may be limited. Execution of the movable body notice effect may be restricted when it is satisfied. Thereby, execution of a movable body notice effect can be restricted based on conditions according to the situation.

  In addition, the monitoring target (the number of executions of the movable body announcement effect, the execution time of the movable body announcement effect, or the load of the driving means (actuator, motor) accompanying the execution of the movable body announcement effect) and the predetermined period When the number of executions of the movable body notice effect per unit time, the execution time, or the load size of the driving means (actuator, motor) is calculated based on the accumulated fluctuation time in, and the calculation result exceeds a predetermined threshold It is good also as restricting execution of a movable body notice effect.

  In the second modification, the number of executions of all the movable body announcement effects is monitored among the plurality of movable body announcement effects having different operation modes of the movable accessory 175. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among a plurality of movable body notice effects, a movable object notice effect in which the operation time of the movable accessory 175 is a certain value, a movable object notice effect in which the load of the driving means (actuator, motor) is more than a certain value, or a restriction target As for the movable body warning effect (movable body warning A and movable body warning B in Modification 2), the number of executions within a predetermined period, the execution time, or the load of the driving means (actuator, motor) accompanying the execution is monitored. Also good.

  In the second modification, the threshold value for determining whether or not the execution ratio of the second effect within a predetermined period is high is always fixed (the number of executions of the movable body notice effect in the last 10 fluctuations is 5 times or more) is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning to the high base state, the threshold is set to 3 or more in the last 10 fluctuations, while when controlling to the low base state, the threshold is set to 5 or more in the last 10 fluctuations. It is good as well.

  In the second modification, the execution of the movable body warning effect is restricted by prohibiting the execution of the movable body warning effect (the execution ratio is set to 0%). It is good also as "restricting execution of the 2nd production" by making it lower than the time of non-limitation. For example, if the movable body notice effect is executed at a rate of 30% when it is not restricted, the movable object notice effect may be executed at a rate of 20% when restricted.

  Further, in the second modification, even when the restriction condition is satisfied (when the number of movements of the movable accessory in the last 10 fluctuations exceeds 5), the movable body notice C corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is executed. Is not limited, but is not limited to this. For example, when the restriction condition is satisfied, the movable body notice C may not be executed even when the variation pattern accompanied by the movable body notice C is selected. Further, when the restriction condition is satisfied, the movable body announcement effect in which the operation time of the movable accessory 175 is shorter than the movable object announcement C, the movable body announcement effect with a low load on the driving means (actuator, motor), It is good also as replacing with the movable body notice effect which operates a movable member, and performing.

  Further, the restriction condition may be provided in stages. For example, if the number of executions of the movable body notice effect in the latest 10 fluctuations is 3 to 5 times, the movable body notice A and the movable body notice B Execution of the movable body warning C may be further restricted if the number of executions of the movable body warning effect is 6 times or more in the latest 10 fluctuations.

  In the second modification, when the limiting condition is satisfied, after the driving means (actuator, motor) radiates heat to such an extent that no malfunction occurs, the driving means (actuator, Even after a sufficient time has elapsed for the motor) to dissipate heat, execution of the movable body notice effect is limited. In that case, since the occurrence frequency of the movable body notice effect is lowered even though no trouble occurs, the effect of production may be lowered. Therefore, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the movable accessory 175 is not operated (for example, when 5 minutes have passed without the movable member being operated, when 5 minutes have passed without fluctuation, the big hit gaming state ends. Or when it is determined that a predetermined period of time elapses when the movable accessory 175 is not operated (for example, when it is determined to shift to the big hit gaming state) The restriction on the movable body notice effect may be canceled by clearing the number storage area). In addition, the monitoring target data may be cleared in response to a small hit or start of execution of a customer waiting demonstration effect.

  Further, in the second modification, except that the execution is limited, the execution ratio of the movable body notice effect is fixed (see FIG. 56A), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of effect modes having different effect contents, the movable body notice effect may be executed at a different rate depending on the effect mode being controlled. Specifically, when the production modes A to C with different backgrounds are provided, the movable body notice production is executed at a ratio of 1/20 in the production mode A, and 1/10 in the production mode B. The movable body announcement effect may be executed at a rate, and if the production mode C, the movable body announcement effect may be executed at a rate of 1/5.

  In that case, the number of executions of the movable body notice effect, the execution period, or the load of the driving means (actuator, motor) should be monitored over a plurality of effect modes (for example, if the latest 10 changes are constantly monitored) When the effect mode is switched, monitoring may be performed in the effect mode before and after the switching, or only in the currently controlled effect mode (data to be monitored when the effect mode is switched) (For example, the operation count storage area in the modified example 2 may be cleared).

  Further, as long as a plurality of effect modes having different execution rates of the movable body notice effect are provided, the degree of restriction may differ depending on the effect mode at the time of restriction. In addition, even when the execution ratio of the second effect within a predetermined period is high, the presence / absence of restrictions on the execution of the movable body notice effect may differ depending on the effect mode. For example, if the production modes A to C as described above are provided, the production mode A is not limited, and the production mode B and the production mode C may be restricted.

  Further, when the execution of the movable body notice effect is restricted, it is possible to shift to a specific effect mode. For example, in the production mode B and the production mode C, when the execution rate of the movable body announcement effect within a predetermined period is high, the execution of the movable body announcement effect is performed by shifting to the production mode A in which the execution rate of the movable body announcement effect is low. It is good also as restricting.

  Moreover, the period for monitoring the execution ratio of the movable body notice effect may be different depending on the effect mode being controlled. For example, in the production mode A, the execution rate of the movable body announcement effect is monitored in the latest 20 changes, in the production mode B, the execution rate of the movable body announcement effect is monitored in the latest 10 changes, and in the production mode C, the latest 5 It is good also as monitoring the execution rate of a movable body notice effect in the fluctuation | variation of times.

  Further, depending on the controlled production mode, the monitoring target (the number of executions of the movable body announcement effect, the execution time of the movable body announcement effect, or the drive means (actuator, motor) associated with the execution of the movable body announcement effect within a predetermined period of time is controlled. The magnitude of the load may be different. For example, in the effect mode A, the number of executions of the movable body notice effect may be monitored, in the effect mode B, the execution period of the movable object notice effect, and in the effect mode C, the number of executions and the execution period of the movable object notice effect may be monitored.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structures shown in embodiment and each modification mentioned above.

  In the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “8” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In addition, about embodiment mentioned above, although the game machine (what is called a 1st type game machine) which transfers to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result of a special symbol and an effect design was demonstrated, the variable provided in the game area | region was demonstrated. A gaming machine (so-called second type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the winning of a gaming ball (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball apparatus (so-called role) It is good also as applying in the game machine which combined 1st type and 2nd type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a ball does not easily pass.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, although the stage control board 12, the audio | voice output board | substrate 13, and the lamp | ramp control board 14 are provided as a board | substrate with which the circuit which controls a stage apparatus is mounted, the circuit which controls a stage apparatus is provided. You may mount on one board | substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the image display device 5 and the like is mounted, and a second circuit on which other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like) are controlled are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with this production control board.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 directly transmits a command to the effect control CPU 120. However, the game control microcomputer 100 may transmit another board (for example, the voice control board 13). A sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the voice control board 13 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp control board 14 and a function of the circuit mounted on the lamp control board 14). You may make it transmit to CPU120 for effect control in the effect control board 12 via another board | substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 that controls the image display device 5 as it is or, for example, by changing it to a simplified command. You may make it do. Even in that case, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are similar to the case where the effect control CPU 120 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 100 in the above embodiment. Alternatively, display control can be performed according to a command received from the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 side determines whether or not it will be a big hit and determines whether the variation pattern type is winning (pre-reading determination), and shows a command (symbol designating command) indicating the winning determination result. , A variation category command) is transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect is executed on the effect control CPU 120 side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. You may comprise so that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may be performed on the control CPU 120 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a command for designating only the value of the jackpot determination random number or the variation pattern type determination random number extracted when the start prize is generated, and the effect control CPU 120 side transmits the command. Further, it may be configured such that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) is performed based on the value of a random number designated by these commands.

  Further, the program and data for realizing the present embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, You may take the form distributed by pre-installing in storage devices, such as a computer apparatus. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  In addition, the game execution form is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the change is started in order to notify the change control pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream to the effect control microcomputer. Although an example in which one variation pattern designation command is transmitted has been shown, variation patterns may be notified to the effect control microcomputer using two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. (2) Before the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called second in the case where the reach is reached (such as the reach type, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect after a stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the “ratio” is, for example, a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0% is included in the relationship (that is, one is assigned 100% and the other is assigned 0%).

  Further, the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like do not depart from the spirit of the present invention. Thus, changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid gaming ball into the gaming area to play a game. A game score for use in a game is given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a member card, and a given game score or game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a game score given by winning a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a gaming machine is shown that is controlled to a probable change state after the jackpot game is ended based on the determination that the probable change jackpot has been determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  In addition, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying the display result is provided. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols each identifiable and derives and displays a definite special symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the changing special symbol may be different from the confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, the fixed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of special symbols that fluctuate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can each be identified and derives and displays a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the decorative pattern that fluctuates may be different from the fixed decorative pattern that is derived and displayed as a variable display result. In other words, the fixed decorative symbols derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of decorative symbols that change.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine. However, a predetermined number of wagers are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. A slot that can execute a game (game) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player The present invention can also be applied to a machine (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of a big bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus)).

  For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and is a movable accessory that performs an operation (for example, a movable accessory provided in the slot machine. It is stored in the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen provided in the machine, and when specified (for example, during production), the movable position that moves to the front of the liquid crystal screen is stored at the origin position (for example, in the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen in the above-described normal state) This is a slot machine that performs a return operation to return to the storage position etc. for a movable accessory that moves to the front of the liquid crystal screen at a specific time, and performs an initial operation of the movable accessory in a manner corresponding to the mode of the return operation. May be.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5HL First start prize memory display area 5HR Second start prize memory display area 5H Start prize memory display area 6A Normal prize ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8 Speaker 9 Lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A First start switch 22B First 2 Start port switch 23 Count switch 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 100 Microcomputer 101, 121 ROM for game control
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display control unit 173A Rotating mechanism 173B Opening / closing mechanism 173C Slide mechanism 173D Lifting mechanism

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A plurality of movable objects that perform movement;
A return operation control means capable of executing a return operation for returning the movable accessory to the origin position;
At least when the power is turned on, a possible initial operation control unit executes an initial operation of the movable won game response Ji in the presence or absence of execution of the return operation,
Production execution means capable of performing the production,
The initial operation control means does not perform an initial operation for a movable accessory for which the return operation has been performed, and performs an initial operation for a movable accessory for which the return operation has not been performed,
The game machine characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing an independent operation effect for operating a movable accessory alone and an interlocked operation effect for operating a plurality of movable accessories in an interlocked manner. The initial operation control means is
If the movable accessory is not at the origin position when the power is turned on, the movable accessory is not moved after returning the movable accessory to the origin position by the return operation,
If the movable accessory is at the origin position when the power is turned on, an initial operation for moving the movable accessory from the origin position is performed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images